Panelboards and Lighting Control EATON PDF

Panelboards and Lighting Control
3.1 Introduction
Panelboards
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-2
3
3.2 EZ™ Box and EZ Trim 3
Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-4
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-4 3
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-5
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-6 3
3.3 Pow-R-Line C Panelboards
Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-7
3
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-8 3
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-10
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-11 3
Type PRL1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-26
Type PRL1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-30 3
Type PRL1a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-34
Type PRL2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-38 3
Type PRL2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-42
Type PRL2a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-46 3
Retrofit Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-50
Type PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-58 3
Type PRL3E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-62
Type PRL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-66 3
Type PRL4D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-76
Type PRL5P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-86 3
3.4 Elevator Control Panelboard
Elevator Control Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-96
3
3.5 Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modifications 3
Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4, Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-98
Modifications Selection Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-98 3
3.6 Pow-R-Command 3
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-107
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-108 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-111
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-120 3
3.7 Metering Service Sections
Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-126 3
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-126
V2-T3-126
3
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-127
V2-T3-127
3
3.8 Pow-R-Stock Plus Program 3
Pow-R-Stock Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-129
3.9 Customer Manufacturing Solution Centers
3
Customer Manufacturing Solution Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-130 3
3
Learn
Online
3
3
3
3
Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA00000000E—April 2014 www.eaton.com V2-T3-1
3.1 Panelboards and Lighting Control
Introduction
Contents
3 Panelboards and Lighting Controls
Description
3 Product Selection Guide
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 Product Selection Guide
3 Product Types
3
3
3
3
3
3 Type PRL1a
Fusible Lighting
Panelboard PRL1aF
Type PRL1a-LX
Column Type Type PRL2a
Fusible Lighting
Panelboard PRL2aF
Type PRL2a-LX,
Column Type
3 Bolt-On or Plug-On Circuit

Breakers 240 Vac Maximum
240 and 480Y/277 Vac
Maximum
Bolt-On Circuit Breakers
240 Vac Maximum
240 or 480Y/277 Vac;
240 and 480Y/277 Vac
Maximum
240 or 480Y/277 Vac;
125/250 Vdc Maximum 125/250 Vdc Maximum
3 Main lugs only
400A maximum
Main lugs only
400A maximum
Main lugs only
225A maximum Main lugs only
Main lugs only
400A maximum Main lugs only
400A maximum 225A maximum
3 Main Circuit breaker Branch overcurrent Main circuit breaker Branch overcurrent
400A maximum protective devices 225A maximum Main circuit breaker protective devices Main circuit breaker
3 Branch circuit breakers

30A maximum,
Single-, two and three-pole Branch circuit breakers
400A maximum 30A maximum,
Single-, two- and three-pole
225A maximum
100A maximum, utilizing Class CC fuses 100A maximum, Branch circuit breakers utilizing Class CC fuses Branch circuit breakers
3 Single-, two- and three-pole Single-, two- and three-pole 100A maximum,
100A maximum,
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V2-T3-2 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—April 2014 www.eaton.com
Introduction
3.1
Product Types, continued
3
3
3
3
3
Retrofit Panelboard 3
PRL-1R and PRL-2R Type PRL3a Type PRL3E Type PRL4 Type PRL5P
Bolt-On Circuit Breakers Bolt-On Circuit Breakers Bolt-On Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers or Fusible Switches Plug-On Circuit Breakers 3
480Y/277 Vac; 240, 480 or 600 Vac; 240, 480Y/277 or 480 Vac; 240, 480 or 600 Vac; 600 Vdc Maximum 240, 480 or 600 Vac;
240 Vac, 480Y/277 Vac 250 Vdc Maximum 250 Vdc Maximum
Main lugs only
250 Vdc Maximum 3
Main lugs only Main lugs only Main lugs only 1200A maximum Main lugs only
225A maximum 800A maximum 600A maximum 1200A maximum 3
Main circuit breaker
225A maximum
600A maximum
600A maximum
1200A maximum Main circuit breaker
1200A maximum 3
Main fusible switch
Branch circuit breakers
100A maximum,
225A maximum,
125A maximum,
1200A maximum Branch circuit breakers
1200A maximum,
3
Single-, two and three-pole Single-, two- and three-pole Single-, two- and three-pole Branch circuit breakers Single-, two- and three-pole
1200A maximum,
3
Branch fusible switches 3
1200A maximum,
two- and three-pole
3
Product Types, continued

3
3
3
3
3
3
Pow-R-Command Metering Service Section Elevator Control Panelboard 3
Bolt-On Circuit Breakers Bolt-On Circuit Breaker or Fusible Bolt-On Fusible Switches
240 or 480Y/277 Vac Switch 240, 480 or 600 Vac 600 Vac Maximum 3
Main lugs only Service entrance panels combining a Controls for up to four elevators
400A maximum main disconnect with a power in a single Panelboard 3
company metering compartment
400A maximum
400–1200A Main lugs only
800A maximum 3
225A maximum,
Branch overcurrent devices
15–200A fusible switches with
3
Single-, two- and three-pole Class J fuse clips maximum
Integral power switching controls Designed to meet specific

3
sections of various codes
impacting elevators 3
3
3
3
EZ Box and EZ Trim
Contents
3 Type PRL1a Panelboard
Description Page
3 EZ Box and EZ Trim
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-5
3 Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-6
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 Product Description Features
3 Eaton’s EZ box and EZ trim
represents the first significant
● Virtually eliminates sharp
edges
change in panelboard box and
3 Trim installs in seconds
●
trim designs in more than a rather than minutes

half-century. The EZ box and
3 Door-in-door is standard
●
EZ trim have been designed
for faster, more secure and
● Ability to adjust flush box
3 safer installations. The new
EZ box and EZ trim are ●
to wall irregularities
Trim installs without the
need for tools
3 provided standard for Eaton’s
Pow-R-Line 1a and Pow-R- ● No exposed hardware
Line 2a lighting panelboards, (because there is none)
3 as well as the Pow-R-Line 3a The EZ box flanges are bent
and Pow-R-Line 3E mid-range and painted, which virtually
3 panelboard. eliminates the sharp edges
associated with traditional
3 boxes. Additionally, all steel
panelboard chassis parts are
3 painted. This significantly
reduces potential injury for
3 material handlers and
installers. Each flange is
Standalone Trim and Bottom Flange Hanger with Notch
adjustable outward up to
3 3/4-inch (19.1 mm). This
feature allows the installer to
3 adjust flush box applications
to be level and flat with the
3 finished wall after the wall
material is installed to help
correct wall irregularities. The
3 new box flange also provides
the means for attaching the
3 EZ trim.
3
3
3
3 Flange Detail Corner Flange Detail

EZ Box and EZ Trim
3.2
Fast Installation
The EZ trim incorporates a groundbreaking design that installs 3
in seconds, rather than minutes. The standard trim features
include door-in-door construction; no exposed hardware and 3
no tools are required for installation.
Each EZ trim includes hangers attached on the right side. The
3
3
bottom trim hanger has a notch in its base. To install, the bottom
hanger is inserted into the bottom right side box flange opening,
resting the notch on the flange.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Trim Hanger Inserted Into Box Flange
The balance of the hangers are aligned with the other flange
openings and pushed in. When all hangers are in the box flange,
the trim is lifted up slightly to clear the notch on the bottom 3
hanger, and the trim in self-supported on the EZ box.
The installation is completed by swinging the trim to the closed
3
position, then lifting and pushing slightly to the right. The trim
will drop into place totally secured. The multi-point catches on
Trim Hanging on Surface Mounted Box
3
the left side of the trim will lock into the left side box flange
openings. 3
To prevent the trim from being removed by non-authorized
persons, a unique sliding means automatically latches in place
3
when the trim door is closed. Along with a new lock, the EZ trim
offers a high degree of door security. 3
Standards and Certifications 3
When used with Eaton’s panelboard chassis, EZ boxes and
EZ trims meet the following applicable industry standards:
3
● UL 50 listed 3
● NEMA Standard PB1
● Federal specifications 3
● National Electrical Code
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
EZ Box and EZ Trim
Product Selection
3
Boxes and Trims Only—Type 1
3
3 Types PRL1a, PRL2a and PRL3a (400A Maximum)
YS Box LT Trim EZ Box 1 EZ Trim 1
3 Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Box Dimensions—Inches (mm) Height Number Number Number Number
3 20.00 W x 5.75 D 36.00 (914.4) YS2036 LT2036S or F EZB2036R EZT2036S or F
(508.0 W x 146.1 D)
42.00 (1066.8) YS2042 LT2042S or F EZB2042R EZT2042S or F
3 48.00 (1219.2) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F
3 60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
YS2060
YS2072
LT2060S or F
LT2072S or F
EZB2060R
EZB2072R
EZT2060S or F
EZT2072S or F
3 90.00 (2286.0) YS2090 LT2090S or F EZB2090R EZT2090S or F
3
Type PRL3a (600A)
3 YS Box LT Trim EZ Box 1 EZ Trim 1
Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
3 Box Dimensions—Inches (mm) Height Number Number Number Number
20.00 W x 5.75 D 36.00 (914.4) YS2036 LTV2036S or F EZB2036R EZTV2036S or F
3 (508.0 W x 146.1 D)
48.00 (1219.2) YS2048 LTV2048S or F EZB2048R EZTV2048S or F
60.00 (1524.0) YS2060 LTV2060S or F EZB2060R EZTV2060S or F
3 72.00 (1828.8) YS2072 LTV2072S or F EZB2072R EZTV2072S or F
3 90.00 (2286.0) YS2090 LTV2090S or F EZB2090R EZTV2090S or F
3 Type PRL3a (800A)

3 YS Box
Catalog
LT Trim
Catalog
3 Box Dimensions—Inches (mm)

28.00 W x 5.75 D
Height
36.00 (914.4)
Number
YS2836
Number
LTV2836S or F
3 48.00 (1219.2) YS2848 LTV2848S or F

60.00 (1524.0) YS2860 LTV2860S or F
3 72.00 (1828.8) YS2872 LTV2872S or F
3
90.00 (2286.0) YS2890 LTV2890S or F
Note
3 1 EZ box must be used with EZ trim.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Pow-R-Line C Panelboards
3.3
Contents
Description Page
3
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-8 3
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-10
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-11 3
Type PRL1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-26
Type PRL1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-30 3
Type PRL1a-LX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-34
Type PRL2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-38 3
Type PRL2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-42
Type PRL2a-LX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-46 3
Retrofit Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-50
Type PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-58 3
Type PRL3E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type PRL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-62
V2-T3-66
3
Type PRL4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type PRL5P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-76
V2-T3-86
3
3
Product Description 3
Lighting and Distribution Panelboards 3
Eaton’s assembled Enclosures Fronts
panelboards are designed for Boxes are code-gauge Fronts (trims) for all 3
sequence phase connection galvanized steel, which panelboards are made of
of branch circuit devices. This
allows complete flexibility of
include a painted box finished code-gauge steel and have a 3
in ANSI-61 light gray to match high durability ANSI-61 light
circuit arrangement (single-,
two- or three-pole) to allow
the trim. gray finish applied by a baked-
on polyester powder coating
3
balance of the electrical load Standard panelboard cabinets paint system.
on each phase. are designed for indoor use. 3
Alternate types are available The fronts for lighting and
Sturdy, rigid chassis
assembly ensures accurate
for indoor and special
purpose applications.
appliance branch circuit
panelboards and small power
3
alignment of interior with
panel front; prevents flexing All enclosures are furnished
distribution panelboards
include a door with rounded The Three-Piece Trim for Larger Power
3
and minimizes possibility in accordance with corners and concealed
3
Distribution Panelboards Provides for
of loosening or damage to Underwriters Laboratories hinges. A flush-type latch and Easy Handling and Installation
current carrying parts during standards and include wiring lock assembly is included. Fronts for power distribution
and after installation. gutters with proper wire
bending space. Special
All locks are keyed alike. panelboards utilize a unique 3
Four-point in-and-out These trims are available in breaker front cover design
cabinets can be provided
adjustment of panel interior at an additional charge.
both surface- and flush-
mounted designs.
in which each device has a
dedicated bolt-on steel cover.
3
is provided to meet critical
depth dimensions on
flush installations. This
The box dimensions shown
are inside dimensions. For
The individual covers form
a single deadfront for the
3
outside dimensions, add panelboard that is used in
compensates for possible
misalignment of box at 1/4-inch (6.4 mm). conjunction with two wiring 3
installation. gutter covers to complete the
Main lugs are mechanical

Standard panelboard boxes are
supplied without knockouts
trim. A door is not finished as 3
part of the standard offering
solderless type and approved
for copper or aluminum
(blank endwalls). on these panelboards but can
be provided, for an additional
3
conductors. charge, using a deeper than
standard box. 3
3
3
EZ Trim Features Standard Door-in-Door 3
with No Exposed Hardware or
Sharp Edges (no Tools are
Required for Installation) 3
Application Description
3
Panelboard Service Entrance Equipment Panelboard Standards Multi-Section Panelboards
3 Selection Factors The National Electrical Code In 2008, both the National When two or more separate
In selecting a panelboard, (NEC) requires that: Electrical Code (Article 408) enclosures are required,
3 the following factors must ● A panel used as service
and UL 67 were updated
to remove the mandated
separate fronts for each box
are standard. A common
be considered:
entrance equipment
3 ● Service (voltage and must be located near
42-circuit limitation. Eaton
offers panelboards with more
front can be furnished at
additional charge.
frequency) the point where the than 42 circuits for those
3 ● Interrupting capacity supply conductors enter jurisdictions that have Interconnecting Multi-
(fully or series rated) the building adopted the 2008 NEC Section Panelboards
3 ● Ampere rating of main
● A panelboard having main
lugs only shall have a
or later. When a panelboard, for
● Ampere ratings of connection to one feeder,
3 maximum of six service For jurisdictions that have| not must be furnished in more
branches adopted the 2008 or
disconnects to de-energize than one section (Box), each
● Environment the entire panelboard from later version of the National
3 Panelboard the supply conductors. Electrical Code, the 42-circuit
section must be furnished
with main bus and terminals
Where more than six limitation for Lighting of the same rating, unless a
3 Short-Circuit Rating
The short-circuit rating
disconnects are required, and Appliance Branch
Panelboards remains in place.
main overcurrent device is
a main service disconnect provided in each section.
3 of Eaton’s assembled
panelboards are test
must be provided Check with your local code
officials to determine specific Sub-feed or through-feed
● A disconnectable electrical
verified by, and listed with, jurisdiction status. provisions must also be
3 Underwriters Laboratories
bond must be provided
between the neutral and included (and priced) to
(UL). Generally, these Panelboard Installation provide connection capability
3 ratings are that of the lowest
●
ground
A service entrance type
NEC requires that the to the second section.
interrupting rated device in operating handle of the
UL label must be factory
3 the panel. topmost mounted device be Note: Sub-feed or through-feed
installed lugs cannot be used on any
no more than 6 feet 7 inches
Certain exceptions to this panelboard that is not protected
Ground fault protection
3
●
(2006.6 mm) above the by a single main overcurrent
rule exist where branch of equipment shall be finished floor and should be device either in the panelboard
devices have been UL tested provided for each service installed per NEC and or immediately upstream, i.e.,
3 in combination with specific
main devices having a higher
disconnect rated 1000A manufacturer’s instructions. service entrance panelboards
or more if the electrical with main lugs only using the six
3 interrupting rating. Where
these defined main devices
service is a solidly
grounded wye system of
Additional boxes and fronts
are required when the
disconnect rule.
and branch breaker components required for

3 combinations are utilized, the
more than 150V to ground,
but not exceeding 600V one panelboard exceed the
series short-circuit rating of phase-to-phase standard box dimensions.
3 the assembled panelboard
Note: Service entrance panels
will be the same as the
3 tested rating of the approved
rated main device in series
must be identified as such on
the order.
3 with the branches. Available

main and branch breaker
combinations are tabulated
3 starting on Page V2-T3-16.
All combinations shown are
3 UL tested and listed.
These series ratings apply to
3 panels having main devices,
or main lug only panelboards
3 fed remotely by the device
listed in the series ratings
3 chart as the main, for which
UL listed tests were
3 conducted.
3
3
3
3
3.3
Sub-Feed Lugs Through-Feed Lugs Multiple Section Panelboard—Flush Mounted
Sub-feed lugs (see figure Through-feed lugs (see figure Shown below is the standard method for flush mounting
3
below) are one means of below) are another method multiple section lighting and distribution panelboards using
interconnecting multi-section to interconnect multi-section standard flush trims. 3
panels. The sub-feed (second panelboards. The incoming
set of) lugs are mounted feeder cables are connected
Multiple Section Panelboard Flush Mounted—
3
directly beside the main lugs. to the main lugs or main
These are required in each
section except the last panel
breaker at the bottom of
panel (Section 1). Another
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
Conduit Nipple for Cross Wiring by Contractor
in the lineup. The feeder
cables are brought into the
set of lugs (through-feed)
are located at the opposite 3
wiring gutter of the first end of the main bus. The
section and connected to interconnecting cables are 3
the main lugs. Another set connected to the through-
of the same size cables are feed lugs in Section 1 and are 3/4
(19.1)
3/4
(19.1)
3/4
(19.1) 3
connected to the sub-feed carried over to the main lugs 3/4
(19.1)
3
lugs (Section 1) and are in Section 2. The connection Wall 1 1/2 Wall
Trim (38.1) Trim
carried over to the main lugs arrangement could be
Top Section Contractor to Mount Boxes
3
of the adjacent panel. Cross reversed, i.e., main lugs at View 1-1/2-inch (38.1 mm) Apart to
connection cables are not top; through-feed lugs at Allow for 3/4-inch (19.1 mm)
furnished by Eaton. Sub-feed bottom end of panel. Cross Extension on Both Flush Trims
lugs are only available on main cables are not furnished 3/4
(19.1)
Trim Outside Edge of Box 3
lug only panels. by Eaton.
Note: Sub-feed lugs may Note: Through-feed lugs 3
not be used on main lug only may not be used on main lug
(six disconnect rule) service
entrance panels.
only (six disconnect rule) service
entrance panels.
3
Sub-Feed Lugs Through-Feed Lugs 3
3
Box Box Box Box
Cross Cables
3
Main
Lugs
Neutral
3
Neutral Neutral
3/4
(19.1)
Panel
Panel
Panel
Panel
Thru-
3
Feed
Lugs
3/4 3/4 3/4
(19.1) (19.1) (19.1)
Neutral
3/4
(19.1) 3
Main Two Section Flush Trim Extends 3/4-inch
Lugs
Conduit
Panelboard
(Flush Mounting)
(19.1 mm) Beyond Outside
of Box on All Four Sides
3
Conduit
3
Incoming Feeder Cables
Section 1 Section 2 Section 1 Section 2 Overcurrent Protection
The following requirements will be found in the NEC:
Each lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard shall be
3
individually protected on the supply side by not more than two
main circuit breakers or two sets of fuses having a combined 3
rating not greater than that on the panelboard.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Branch Circuit Loading Exception: There is one Harmonic Currents Eaton can provide protective
3 for Lighting Panels exception to this rule in both Standard panelboard neutrals and diagnostic systems
UL and NEC. It applies to are rated for 100% of the integral to panelboards.
3 The size of mains and
branches should be selected assemblies and overcurrent panelboard current. However, The surge protective device
based on the following: devices that have been listed since harmonic currents can (SPD) is integrated into the
3 ● Motor circuits: NEC
for continuous duty at 100%
of its rating.
cause overheated neutrals, panelboards using a “zero
lead length” direct bus bar
an option is provided for
3 ●
Article 430
Diversity factor
Special Conditions neutrals to be rated at 200%
(1200A maximum neutral for
connection.
Standard panelboards,
3 ● Provision for future loading
assembled with standard
600A main bus) of the
panelboard phase current.
Exception Number 1: components, are adequate
3 Individual protection for for most applications.
However, special
Panelboards with the 200%
a lighting panelboard is not rated neutral are UL listed as
3 required when the
panelboard feeder has
consideration should be
given to those required for
suitable for use with non-
linear loads.
application under special
3 overcurrent protection not
greater than that of the conditions such as: Prior to specifying the 200%
rated neutral, Eaton
panelboard.
3 Exception Number 2:
● Excessive vibration
or shock
recommends a harmonic
survey be conducted of the
3 For existing installations,
individual protection for
● Frequencies above
60 cycles
distribution system, be it new
or existing.
lighting panelboards is not
3 Altitudes above 6600 feet
●
required where such

Surge Protective Devices
(2011.7m)
panelboards are used as The quality of power feeding Pow-R-Line 4
3 Damp environment
●
service equipment in sensitive electronic loads is The SPD protects sensitive
(possible fungus growth) critical to the reliable operation
supplying an individual electronic equipment from the
3 Compliance with federal,
●
residential occupancy and of any facility. In modern damaging effects of high and
where any bus supplying state and municipal offices, hospitals, and low energy transients, as well
electrical codes and manufacturing facilities, the
3 15 or 20A circuits is protected
on the supply side by an standards most frequent causes of
as high frequency noise.
overcurrent device. microprocessor-based

3 Seismic Considerations
The Uniform Building Code®
equipment downtime and Standards and
Ambient Temperatures damage are voltage transients Certifications
3 The primary function of an
overcurrent device is to
and the International Building
Code, as well as local and
and electrical noise. Eaton’s panelboards are
Electrical loads and designed to meet the
state building codes, place
3 protect the conductor
and its insulation against an emphasis on seismic microprocessor-based following applicable
industry standards,
building design requirements. equipment are highly
overheating. In selecting
3 the size of the devices and Electrical distribution systems susceptible to both high and
low energy transients. High
except where noted:
conductors, consideration are treated as attachments to ● Underwriters Laboratories:

3 should be given to the the building and therefore, fall
into this category.
energy transients include
lightning induced surges and
● Panelboards: UL 67
ambient temperature ● Cabinets and Boxes:
power company switching.
3 surrounding the conductors
within and external to the
All Eaton panelboards are These high energy transients UL 50
seismic qualified at the can destroy components Note: Only panelboards
3 panelboard. Cumulative
heating within the panelboard
highest possible level,
and have been tested in
instantly. containing UL listed devices
can be UL labeled.
may cause premature More frequently the electrical
3 operation of the overcurrent
accordance with ANSI
C37.81. This standard system experiences low ● National Electrical Code
protective devices. quantifies actual earthquake energy transients and high ● NEMA Standards: PB 1
3 Underwriters Laboratories conditions, as well as frequency noise. ● Federal Specification
test procedures are based, equipment seismic capability. W-P-115c:
3 in part, on 80% loading of
The effects of continual low
energy transients and high ● Circuit Breakers—
panelboard branch circuit frequency noise can cause Type I Class I
3 devices. The NEC limits erratic equipment ● Fusible Switch—
the loading of overcurrent performance or sudden Type II Class I
3 devices in panelboards
to 80% of rating where in
failure of electronic circuit
board components.
3 normal operation the load will
continue for three hours or
more. Further derating may
3 be required, depending on
such factors as ambient
3 temperature, duty cycle,
frequency or altitude.
3
3.3
Technical Data and Specifications
3
Panelboard Selection Guide
Maximum Maximum Main AC Interrupting Capacity
3
3
Voltage Rating Rating (Amperes) rms Symmetrical Amperes (kA)
Panelboard Device Branch Circuits Sub-Feed Breaker
Type Type AC DC MLO Main Device Ampere Range Maximum Amperes Fully Rated Series Rated
PRL1a Breaker 240 — 400 400 15–100 400 10–22 22–100 3
PRL1R
PRL1aF
Breaker
Fusible
240
240
—
—
225
400
225
400
15–100
15–30
—
400
10–22
200
22–100
—
3
PRL1a-LX Breaker 240 — 225 225 15–100 — 10–22 22–100 3
PRL2a Breaker 240 250 400 400 15–100 400 65 65–200
Breaker 480Y/277 250 400 400 15–100 400 14 22–150 3
PRL2R Breaker 240 — 225 225 15–100 — 10–22 22–200
Breaker 480Y/277 — 225 225 15–100 — 14 22–100
3
PRL2aF
PRL2a-LX
Fusible
Breaker
480Y/277
240
—
250
400
225
400
225
15–30
15–100
400
—
200
65
—
65–200
3
Breaker 480Y/277 250 225 225 15–100 — 14 22–150 3
PRL3a Breaker 240 250 800 600 15–225 600 10–200 22–200
Breaker 480 250 800 600 15–225 600 14–100 22–150 3
3
Breaker 600 250 800 600 15–225 600 14–35 —
PRL3E Breaker 240 250 600 600 15–125 400 25–100 100–200
Breaker 480Y/277 250 600 600 15–125 400 18–65 65–100
3
Breaker 480 250 600 600 15–125 400 18–65 65–100
PRL4B Breaker 240 600 1200 1200 15–1200 — 10–200 22–200 3
Breaker 480 600 1200 1200 15–1200 — 14–200 22–150
Breaker 600 600 1200 1200 15–1200 — 14–200 — 3
PRL4D Breaker
Breaker
240
480
—
—
1200
1200
1200 1
1200 1
600
600
—
—
65–200
35–100
—
—
3
Breaker 600 — 1200 1200 1 600 — 18–50 — 3
PRL4F Fusible 240 250 1200 1200 30–1200 — 100–200 —
Fusible 600 250 1200 1200 30–1200 — 100–200 — 3
PRL5P Breaker 240 250 1200 1200 15–1200 — 10–200 22–200
Breaker 480 250 1200 1200 15–1200 — 14–200 22–150 3
PRC100 PRC25
Breaker
Breaker
600
240
250
—
1200
400
1200
400
15–1200
15–225
—
—
14–200
10–65
—
22–100
3
Breaker 480Y/277 — 400 400 15–225 — 14 65–100 3
Elevator Control Fusible 240 — 800 800 15–200 — 200 —
Fusible 480Y/277 — 800 800 15–200 — 200 — 3
3
Fusible 480 — 800 800 15–200 — 200 —
Note
1 Fixed mounted only.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Terminal Wire Ranges, Pressure-Type Al/Cu Terminals Except as Noted

3 Note: All terminal sizes are based Where copper-aluminum Check Eaton’s standard Optional 750 kcmil
on wire ampacities corresponding terminals are supplied on terminal sizes versus mechanical screw-type
3 to those shown in NEC Table
310.16 under the 75°C insulation
designated panelboard types, customer requirements. terminals are available
best results are obtained if a In particular, 400 and 800A upon request. Panelboard
3 columns (75°C wire). The use of
smaller size, (in circular mills),
suitable joint compound is breakers often require dimensions may be affected,
regardless of insulation applied when aluminum nonstandard lugs. refer to Eaton.
3 temperature rating, is not
permitted.
conductors are used.
3 Standard Main Lug Terminals

3 Panel Type
Wire Size Ranges for Ampere Capacity
100A 225A 250A 400A 600A 800A 1200A
3 PRL1a #12–1/0 #6–300 kcmil — (2) #4–500 kcmil — — —

PRL2a #12–1/0 #6–300 kcmil — (2) #4–500 kcmil — — —
3 PRL1R #12–1/0 #6–300 kcmil — (2) #4–500 kcmil — — —
3 PRL2R
PRL1aF
#12–1/0
#12–1/0
#6–300 kcmil
#6–300 kcmil
—
—
(2) #4–500 kcmil
(2) #4–500 kcmil
—
—
—
—
—
—
3 PRL2aF #12–1/0 #6–300 kcmil — (2) #4–500 kcmil — — —

PRL3a #12–1/0 — #6–350 kcmil (2) #4–500 kcmil (2) #4–500 kcmil (3) #4–500 kcmil —
3 PRL3E #12–1/0 — #6–350 kcmil (2) #4–500 kcmil (2) #4–500 kcmil — —
PRL4 — — #4–500 kcmil (2) #4–500 kcmil (2) #4–500 kcmil (3) #4–500 kcmil (4) #4–500 kcmil
3 PRL1a-LX #12–1/0 #6–300 kcmil — — — — —
3 PRL2a-LX
PRC100
#12–1/0
#12–1/0
#6–300 kcmil
—
—
#6–350 kcmil
—
(2) #4–500 kcmil
—
—
—
—
—
—
3 PRC25 #12–1/0 #6–300 kcmil — (2) #4–500 kcmil — — —

PRL5P — — — (1) #1/0–500 kcmil (2) #4–500 kcmil (2) #2–500 kcmil (4) #4–750 kcmil
3 or
(2) #1/0–250 kcmil
or
(3) #2–400 kcmil
3 Elevator Control — — #4–500 kcmil (2) #4/0–500 kcmil (2) #4/0–500 kcmil (3) #4/0–500 kcmil —
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Standard Circuit Breaker Terminals FDPW Switch Terminals
Breaker Type Ampere Rating Wire Range Ampere Rating Wire Range
3
BAB, QBHW, BABRSP,
HQP, QPHW
15–70 #14–#4 30 #14–1/0
3
90–100 #8–1/0 60 #14–1/0
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC 100–225 #4–4/0 or #6–300 kcmil 100 #14–1/0 3
EGB, EGE, EGS, EGH 15–50 #14–3/0 AL/CU 200 #4–300 kcmil
60–125 #6–3/0 AL/CU 400 250–750 kcmil or (2) 3/0–250 kcmil 3
EHD, FDB, FD,
HFD, FDC, HFDDC 2
15–100
125–225
#14–1/0
#4–4/0
600
800
(2) #4–600 kcmil or (4) 3/0–250 kcmil
(3) 250–750 kcmil or (6) 3/0–250 kcmil
3
FCL 15–100 #14–1/0 1200 (4) 250–750 kcmil or (8) 3/0–250 kcmil 3
GHB, HGHB, GHQ, 15–20 #14–#10
GHQRSP
25–100 #10–1/0 3
Elevator Control Panel Feeder Terminals
EGB, EGS, EGH 15–50 #14–1/0
60–125 #6–2/0
Ampere Rating Wire Range 3
30 #14–1/0
JD, HJD, JDC, HJDDC 2 70–250 #4–350 kcmil
60 #14–1/0
3
DK 250–350 250–500 kcmil
400 (2) 3/0–250 kcmil or (1) 3/0–500 kcmil
100 #14–1/0
3
200 #4–300 kcmil
KD, 225 (1) #3–350 kcmil
HKD, KDC, HKDDC, 2
CKD, CHKD
350 (2) 3/0–250 kcmil or Notes 3
1 LHH is 400A maximum.
3
400 (2) 3/0–250 kcmil or (1) 3/0–500 kcmil 2 Suitable for DC applications only.
LHH 150–400 #2–500 kcmil
150–400 (2) #2–500 kcmil
3
150–400 (1) 500–750 kcmil
LGE, LGH, LGC, 250–400 (1) #2–500 kcmil 3
LGU, LHH 1
500–600 (2) #2–500 kcmil
LD, HLD, LDC, HLDDC 2 300–500 (2) 250–350 kcmil 3
CLD, CHLD
MDL, HMDL, HMDLDC 2

600
400–600
(2) 400–500 kcmil
(2) #1–500 kcmil
3
3
CMDL, CHMDL
700–800 (3) 3/0–400 kcmil
ND, HND, CND, CHND, NDC, 800–1000 (3) 3/0–400 kcmil
CNDC
1200 (4) 4/0–500 kcmil 3
LCL 125–225 (1) #6–350 kcmil
250–400 (1) #4–250 kcmil and (1) 3/0–600 kcmil
3
FB-P 15–100 #14–1/0
3
LA-P 70–225 #6–350 kcmil
250–400 (1) #4–250 kcmil and (1) 3/0–600 kcmil 3
NB-P, NBDC 2 300–700 (2) #1–500 kcmil
800 (3) 3/0–400 kcmil 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Selection Guide
3
3
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Ratings
Note: Circuit breakers equal or exceed Federal Specification W-C-375b requirements for the particular class associated with each circuit breaker type.
3 Maximum
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings—kA Symmetrical Amperes
AC Rating Volts DC Rating Volts 1
3
Breaker Continuous Number Voltage
Type Ampere Rating of Poles AC 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250
3
BAB 23, HQP 23 15–70 1 120 10 — — — — — —
15–100 2 120/240 10 — — — — — —
3 15–100 2, 3 240 — 10 — — — — —
BABRP, BABRSP 2 15–30 1 120 10 — — — — — —
3 15–30 2 120/240 10 — — — — — —
QBGF, QBGFEP, 15–40 1 120 10 — — — — — —
3 QPGF, QPGFEP,
QBAF, QBAG
15–50 2 120/240 10 — — — — — —
3 15–20
15–20
1
2
120
120/240
10
10
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3 QBHW 23, QPHW 23 15–70 1 120 22 — — — — — —

15–100 2 120/240 22 — — — — — —
3 15–100 2, 3 240 — 22 — — — — —
QBHGF, QBHGFEP, 15–30 1 120 22 — — — — — —
3 QPHGF, QPHGFEP
15–30 2 120/240 22 — — — — — —
3 GQ, GHQ 2, GHQRSP,

GHB 23
15–20 1 277 65 — 14 — — — —
15–100 4 1 277 65 — 14 — — 14 —
3 15–100 4 2, 3 480Y/277 — 65 — 14 — — 14
HGHB 2, 15–30 1 277 65 — 25 — — — —
3 GHBGFEP
15–60 1 277 — — 14 — — — —
3
GHBS 15–30 1 277 65 — 14 — — — —
15–30 2 480Y/277 — 65 — 14 — — —
3 EHD 23 15–100 1 277 — — 14 — — 10 —

15–100 2, 3 480 — 18 — 14 — — 10
3 EGB 15–125 1 277 35 35 18 — — 10 —
15–125 2, 3 480 — 35 — 18 — — 10
3 EGS 15–125 1 277 100 — 35 — — 35 —
3 EGH
15–125
15–125
2, 3
1
480
277
—
200
100
—
—
65
35
—
—
—
—
42
35
—
3 15–125 2, 3 480 — 200 — 65 — — 42

FDB 5, 15–150 2, 3 600 — 18 — 14 14 — 10
3 FD 23
15–150 1 277 — — 35 — — 10 —
15–225 2, 3 600 — 65 — 35 18 — 10
3 HFD 23 15–150 1 277 — — 65 — — 10 —
3 15–225 2, 3 600 — 100 — 65 25 — 22
Notes
3 1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2 15 and 20A single-pole switching duty rated for fluorescent applications.
3
3 Single-, two- and three-pole HACR rated.
4 DC rated single-pole, 15–70A only.
5 Two- and three-pole HACR rated.
3
3
3
3
3.3
Selection Guide, continued
3
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Ratings, continued
Note: Circuit breakers equal or exceed Federal Specification W-C-375b requirements for the particular class associated with each circuit breaker type. 3
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings—kA Symmetrical Amperes 3
Breaker Continuous Number Volts AC Rating Volts DC Rating Volts 1
Type Ampere Rating of Poles AC 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 3
2
FDC 15–225 2, 3 600 — 200 — 100 35 — 22
FCL 15–100 2, 3 480 — 200 — 150 — — —
3
3
2
EDB 100–225 2, 3 240 — 22 — — — 10 —
EDS 2 100–225 2, 3 240 — 42 — — — 10 —
ED 2 100–225 2, 3 240 — 65 — — — 10 — 3
EDH 2 100–225 2, 3 240 — 100 — — — 10 —
EDC 2 100–225 2, 3 240 — 200 — — — 10 — 3
EGB 2
3
15–125 1, 2, 3 240 — 25 — 18 — — —
EGE 2 15–125 1, 2, 3 240 — — — — 18 — —
EGS 2 15–125 1, 2, 3 240 — 85 — 35 22 — —
3
EGH 2 15–125 1, 2, 3 240 — 100 — 65 25 — —
JD 2 70–250 2, 3 600 — 65 — 35 18 — 10 3
HJD 2 70–250 2, 3 600 — 100 — 65 25 — 22
JDC 2 70–250 2, 3 600 — 200 — 100 35 — 22 3
DK
KD, CKD 3
250–400
100–400
2, 3
2, 3
240
600
—
—
65
65
—
—
—
35
—
25
—
—
10
10 4
3
HKD, CHKD 3 100–400 2, 3 600 — 100 — 65 35 — 22 4 3
LHH 5 150–400 2, 3 480 — 100 — 65 35 — 42
KDC 100–400 2, 3 600 — 200 — 100 65 — 22 4 3
LCL 5 125–400 2, 3 600 — 200 — 200 100 — —
LGE 250–600 3 600 — 65 — 35 18 — 22
3
LGC 5 250–600 2, 3 600 — 200 — 100 50 — 42
3
LGU 5 250–600 2, 3 600 — 200 — 150 65 — 50
LD 5, CLD 35 300–600 2, 3 600 — 65 — 35 25 — 22 4 3
LGH 250–600 3 600 — 100 — 65 35 — 22
HLD 5, CHLD 35 300–600 2, 3 600 — 100 — 65 35 — 25 4 3
3
LDC 5, CLDC 35 300–600 2, 3 600 — 200 — 100 50 — 25 4
MDL 5, CMDL 35 400–800 2, 3 600 — 65 — 50 25 — 22 4

HMDL 5, CHMDL 35 400–800 2, 3 600 — 100 — 65 35 — 25 4
3
ND 5, CND 35 600–1200 2, 3 600 — 65 — 50 25 — —
HND 5, CHND 35 600–1200 2, 3 600 — 100 — 65 35 — — 3
NDC 5, CNDC 35 600–1200 2, 3 600 — 200 — 100 65 — —
Integrally Fused, Current Limiting Circuit Breakers 3
3
6
FB-P 15–100 2, 3 600 — 200 — 200 200 —
6
LA-P 70–400 2, 3 600 — 200 — 200 200 —
NB-P 300–800 2, 3 600 — 200 — 200 200 — 6
3
Notes
1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 3
2 Two- and three-pole HACR rated.
3 100% rated circuit breaker. 3
4 DC rating not available with electronic trip.
5 Available with integral ground fault protection.
6 100k based on NEMA test procedure.
3
3
3
Series Rated Combinations Applying Series Ratings Page V2-T3-17

3 Underwriters Laboratories The following is provided to 120/240 Vac—Breaker/
permits panelboards to be use the series rating tables Breaker
3 labeled with a short-circuit on the following pages.
rating of up to 200 kA Page V2-T3-19
3 symmetrical where UL listed
1. Determine the available
system voltage and
240 Vac—Breaker/Breaker
combinations of main and
fault current.
3 branch circuit breakers
are used.
Page V2-T3-21
2. Select the appropriate 277 Vac—Breaker/Breaker
3 These combinations consist
table using the
system voltage. Page V2-T3-21
of main breakers or fusible
3 devices connected ahead of, 3. Use the appropriate 480Y/277 Vac—Breaker/
Breaker
and in series with approved “Series Equipment
3 conventional breakers used
as branch devices.
Rating” column equal
to, or greater than, the
Page V2-T3-22
480 Vac—Breaker/Breaker
3 Two arrangements are
available fault current, to
determine the allowable
acceptable and comply Page V2-T3-23
UL recognized
3 with UL standards for
panelboards. The main
combinations of main 600 Vac—Breaker/Breaker
(upstream) and branch
3 circuit breaker or fusible
switch may be installed in
(downstream) Page V2-T3-23
overcurrent devices. 120/240 Vac—Fuse/Breaker
the panel as a main device,
3 or it may be mounted
Main devices are shown
in bold/shaded areas. Page V2-T3-24
remote, (directly upstream)
3 from the panel. In either
case, the approved main
Respective branch
breakers are shown
240 Vac—Fuse/Breaker
directly below their Page V2-T3-24
3 and branch combinations
must be followed. These
associated main device. 277 Vac—Fuse/Breaker
If a rating is not initially
arrangements are acceptable
3 and are UL listed having been
found in a column, first
look to the columns
Page V2-T3-25
tested in accordance with 480Y/277 Vac—Fuse/Breaker
3 UL 67 standards.
to the right for higher
“Series Equipment
Page V2-T3-25
Ratings” within the
3 From the tables that follow,
specific combinations of same table. If still not 480 Vac—Fuse/Breaker
main devices (upstream) found, use ratings from
3 and branch devices table of a higher system Page V2-T3-25
(downstream), series voltage (higher 600 Vac—Fuse/Breaker
3 connected and electrically
adjacent in the system, may
numbered table(s).
Page V2-T3-25
3 be selected to qualify the

assembled panelboard for the
Triple Series Ratings
short-circuit ratings shown.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Series Rating Tables
3
120/240 Vac—Breaker/Breaker Series Ratings
Main devices are shown at top in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below. 3
Main Breaker
Maximum Amperes
Series Equipment Rating—kA Symmetrical
18 22 42 65 100 200
3
100 EHD QBHW GB, GHB FB-P FCL
3
BA, BAB QPHW BA, BAB BA, BAB BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
BABRP
BABRSP
BABRP
BABRSP 3
HQP HQP HQP HQP HQP
QBGF
QBAF
QBGF
QPGF
QBGF
QPGF
QBGF
QPGF
QBGF
QPGF
3
QBAF
3
QBAF QBAF QBAF
QBAG QBAG QBAG
QBHW QBHW QBHW
QPHW QPHW
EHD
QPHW
GB, GHB 3
FD GHQ
EHD
FD
3
HFD
125 FDB EGS
3
BA, BAB
HQP
GHQ, GHB
3
QBGF
QBAF
QBAG
3
150 FDB
3
BA, BAB
HQP
QBGF 3
QBAF
QBAG 3
200 LA-P
BA, BAB 3
HQP
QBHW
QPHW 3
EHD
FD 3
225 EDB EDS ED, FD, FDE EDH, CHH HFD, HFDE FDC FDC
BA, BAB BA, BAB BA, BAB BA, BAB BA, BAB BA, BAB GB, GHB 3
BABRP BABRP BABRP BABRP HQP HQP GHQ
BABRSP
HQP
BABRSP
HQP
BABRSP
HQP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QBAF
QBHW
QPHW
GHQRSP
EHD 3
QBGF QBGF QBGF QBGF QBAG FD
QPGF
QBHGF
QPGF
QBHGF
QPGF
QBAF
QPGF
QBAF
QBHW
QPHW
HFD
EGS
3
3
QPHGF QPHGF QBAG QBAG QBHGF EGH
QBHW QBHW QBHW GB, GHB
QPHW QPHW QBHGF GHQ, GHQRSP
QBAF
QBAG
QBAF
QBAG
EHD
FD, EGS 3
250 JD, JDB
BA (15–70A)
HJD
BA, BAB
JDC
QBGF
HJD
GB, GHB
JDC
BA, BAB
JDC
GB, GHB
3
3
BAB (15–70A) HQP QPGF EHD HQP EHD
HQP (15–70A) QBHW QBAF FD QBHW FD
QBHW QPHW QBAG EGS QPHW HFD
QPHW
EHD
EGS
EGH 3
3
3
3
3
120/240 Vac—Breaker/Breaker Series Ratings, continued

3 Main devices are shown at top in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
3 Main Breaker Series Equipment Rating—kA Symmetrical

Maximum Amperes 18 22 42 65 100 200
3 400 DK, KD DK, KD HKD, CHKD DK, KD KDC HKD KDC KDC LCL
KDB KDB, CKD KDB CHKD
BA (15–70A) BA (15–70A) QBHW GB, GHB BA, BAB
3 BA, BAB
BABRP
BA (15–70A)
BAB (15–70A)
BAB (15–70A)
BABRP
CKD
EHD
BAB (15–70A)
HQP (15–70A)
GB, GHB
EHD
QPHW EHD
FD
HQP
QBGF
3
BABRSP BABRP BABRSP FD HFD QPGF
HQP BABRSP HQP (15–70A) EGS 1 EGS QBAF
QBGF HQP (15–70A) QBHW EGH QBAG
3 QPGF QBHW QPHW QBHW

QBAF QPHW QPHW
QBAG GB, GHB
3 EHD
FD
HFD
3 600 CHLD, HLD
EHD
3 800 HMDL
3 1200
EHD
HND
3 EHD
Note
3 1 Not valid with CHKD.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
240 Vac—Breaker/Breaker Series Ratings
For single- and two-pole 120/240 volt rated breakers (BA, BAB, HQP, QBHW, QPHW), see Page V2-T3-17. 3
Main devices are shown at top in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
Main Breaker Series Equipment Rating—kA Symmetrical 3
100 EHD QBHW_H GB, GHB FB-P FCL
3
3
BAB_H QPHW_H
BAB_H BAB_H BAB_H
HQP_H BAB_H HQP_H HQP_H HQP_H
HQP_H QBHW_H EHD QBHW_H
QPHW_H FDB
FD
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
3
3
EHD
FD, FDE
FDB
HFD, HFDE
3
125 EGH
GHB 3
150 FDB
BAB_H 3
HQP_H
200 LA-P 3
BAB_H
HQP_H 3
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
EHD 3
FDB
FD
JD, JDB
3
225 EDB EDS ED FD, FDE EDH, EDC HFD, HFDE FDC FDC
3
HQP_H HQP_H BAB_H BAB_H BAB_H BAB_H BAB_H GB, GHB
BAB_H
QBHW
BAB_H
QBHW
HQP_H
QBHW_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
HQP_H HQP_H
QBHW_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
EHD
FDB 3
QPHW QPHW QPHW_H QPHW_H QPHW_H FD, FDE
EHD (15–70A)
FDB
GB, GHB
EHD
HFD, HFDE 3
FDB
FD, FDE 3
CHH
BAB_H 3
250 JD, JDB
BAB_H (15–70A)
HJD
BAB_H (15–70A)
HJD
GB, GHB
JDC
BAB_H
JDC
GB, GHB
3
3
HQP_H (15–70A) HQP_H (15–70A) EHD HQP_H EHD
QBHW_H QBHW_H FD QBHW_H FD, FDE
QPHW_H QPHW_H FDB QPHW_H FDB
EHD
FDB
ED
JD, JDB
HFD, EDB, EDS, HFDE
ED 3
EGS EDH
JD, JDB
HJD, EGS, EGH
3
Note
1 Valid with BAB_H only.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
240 Vac—Breaker/Breaker Series Ratings, continued

3 For single- and two-pole 120/240 volt rated breakers (BA, BAB, HQP, QBHW, QPHW), see Page V2-T3-17.
3
Maximum Amperes 65 100 200
400 DK, KD, KDB HKD, CHKD KDC KDC LCL
3
CKD
QBHW_H 1 QBHW_H GB, GHB BAB_H
BAB_H QPHW_H 1 QPHW_H EHD HQP_H
HQP_H GB, GHB FDB QBHW_H
3 QBHW_H EHD
FDB, FDE
FD, FDE, HFDE
HFD, EDB, EDS
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
QPHW_H
3 EHD FD, EDB, EDS ED EHD

FDB ED EDH FDB, FDE, HFDE
JD, JDB JD, JDB FD, HFD, EDB, EDS
3 DK, KD, KDB
EGS 2
HJD
DK, KD, KDB
ED
EDH
HKD JD, JDB
3 HJD
DK, KD, KDB
3
HKD
500 NB-P
3 JD, JDB
KD, KDB, DK
CKD
3 600 HLD, HLDB, CHLD LDC
3 GB 1, GHB 1
FD, EDB, EDS
EDB, EDS, ED
EDH
ED, EHD
3 JD, JDB
KD, KDB, DK, CKD
LD, LDB
3 800 NB-P HMDL
3 KD, KDB, DK EHD

FD
3
1200 HND, CHND NDC
EDB, EDS, ED EDB, EDS, ED
EHD EDH
3 2500 RD RDC
3 EDB, EDS, ED EDB, EDS, ED

EDH
3 Notes
1 Valid on two- and three-pole breakers only. Not valid for single-pole.
3
2 Not valid with CHKD.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Main devices are shown at top in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below. 3
All ratings in this table apply to single-pole branch breakers only. For two- and three-pole branch breakers, see other tables.
100 FCL
3
GHB
GHQ, GHQRSP
3
EHD
FD
HFD
3
125 EGS EGH 3
GHQ GHQ
GHB GHB
3
225 FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC
GHB GHB, GHQRSP 2 GHB 3
GHQ GHQ EHD
GHQRSP 1 EHD
FD
FD
HFD 3
3
250 JD, JDB JD, JDB HJD LCL JDC
GHB GHB (15–50A) GHB (15–50A) GHBS GHB
EHD EHD
FD FD 3
HFD
400 KD, KDB HKD KD, KDB HKD, CHKD KDC LCL 3
CKD CHKD CKD
GHB (15–50A) GHB (15–50A) GHB
GHB GHB GHB (15–50A)
EHD
EHD
FD
EHD
FD
EHD
FD
3
3
FD HFD HFD
480Y/277 Vac—Breaker/Breaker Series Ratings

3
All ratings in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers only. For single-pole branch breakers, see table above. 3
Main Breaker
Maximum Amperes
22 25 35 65 100 150
3
100 FCL
3
GHB, GHQRSP
125 EGS EGH 3
GHB GHB
225 FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC 3
3
GHB, GHQRSP 1 GHB, GHQRSP 2 GHB
250 JD, JDB JD, JDB HJD JDC
GHB GHB (15–50A) GHB (15–50A) GHB 3
400 KD, KDB HKD, CHKD KD, KDB HKD, CHKD KDC LCL
CKD GHB CKD GHB (15–50A) GHB (15–50A) GHB 3
GHB GHB (15–50A)
Notes 3
1 Not valid with FDE.
2 Not valid with HFDE. 3
3
3
3
3
3

3 Main devices are shown at top in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
All ratings in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers only. Not valid for single-pole branch breakers.
3
Maximum Amperes 25 35 65 100 150
100 FB-P FCL
3 EHD
FDB
EHD
FDB
FD FD, FDE
3 HFD HFD, HFDE
200 LA-P
3 EHD
FDB
3 FD
HFD
JD, JDB
3 HJD
225 FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC
3 EHD EHD EHD, EGS, EGH
FDB FDB FDB
3 FD, FDE
EGS 1
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
3 250 JD, JDB HJD JDC LCL

EHD EHD EHD, EGS, EGH FDE, HFDE
3 FDB FDB
FD, FDE
FDB
FD, FDE
JD, JDB, EGS HFD, HFDE
3 JD, JDB
HJD
3 400 KD, KDB HKD KDC LA-P LCL

EHD EHD EHD, EGS, EGH JD, JDB EHD
3 FDB FDB
FD, FDE
FDB
FD, FDE
HJD
KD, KDB
FDB
FD, FDE
JD, JDB HFD, HFDE HKD HFD, HFDE
3 KD, KDB, EGS JD, JDB
HJD
FDC
JD, JDB
KD, KDB HJD
3 HKD KD, KDB
HKD
3 500 NB-P
JD, JDB
3 HJD
KD, KDB
HKD
3 600 LD, LDB HLD, HLDB
CLD CHLD
3 JD, JDB FD, FDE
JD, JDB
3 KD, KDB
LD, LDB
3 Note
1 Not valid with HFDE.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
600 VacXXX—Breaker/Breaker Series Ratings
Main fuse class shown at top in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below. 3
All ratings in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers only. Not valid for single-pole branch breakers.
225 FD HFD FDC
3
FDB FDB
FD, FDE
FDB
FD, FDE
3
HFD, HFDE
250 JD, JDB HJD JDC LCL 3
FDB FDB
FD, FDE
FDB
FD, FDE
FDE, HFDE
3
JD, JDB HFD, HFDE
JD, JDB
HJD
3
400 KD, KDB
CKD
HKD, CHKD KDC KDC LCL
3
FDB FDB JD, JDB FDB
FDB
FD, FDE
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
HJD
KD, KDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE 3
JD, JDB JD, JDB HKD FDC
HJD JD, JDB
HJD
3
JDC
KD, KDB
HKD
3
600 LD, LDB HLD, HLDB
KDC
3
3
CLD CHLD
FD, FDE KD, KDB
3
JD, JDB LD, LDB
120/240 Vac—Fuse/Breaker Series Ratings 3

Main fuse class shown at top in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
3
Main Fuse
Maximum Amperes 100 200 3
100 R
BA, BAB 3
HQP
QBHW
QPHW 3
GB
GHB 3
200 R J T
GB BA, BAB BA, BAB 3
GHB HQP HQP
QBHW
QPHW
QBHW
QPHW
3
400 J T J T
3
BA, BAB BA, BAB GB GB
HQP
QBHW
HQP
QBHW
GHB GHB
3
QPHW QPHW
3
3
3
3
3
3
240 Vac—Fuse/Breaker Series Ratings

3 For single-pole and two-pole 120/240 volt rated breakers (BA, BAB, HQP, QBHW, QPHW), see Page V2-T3-23.
Main fuse class shown at top in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
3 Main Fuse
3 Maximum Amperes
100
100 200
R
3 BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
3 QPHW_H
GB
3
GHB
200 R J T R
3 GB
GHB
BAB_H
HQP_H
BAB_H
HQP_H
GB 1
GHB 1
QBHW_H QBHW_H
3 QPHW_H QPHW_H
400 J T J T
3 BAB_H BAB_H GB GB
HQP_H HQP_H GHB GHB
3 QBHW_H
QPHW_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
3 600 L
EHD
3 FDB
FD, FDE
ED
3 JD, JDB
DK, KD, KDB
3
3 277—Vac Fuse/Breaker Series Ratings
Main fuse class are shown at top in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
3
All ratings in this table apply to single-pole branch breakers only. For two- and three-pole branch breakers, consult other tables.
Main Fuse
3 Maximum Amperes 65 100 200
100 J T R
3 GHBS GHBS GHB
GHQ GHQ
3 GHQRSP GHQRSP
200 J T J T R
3 GHBS
GHQ
GHBS
GHQ
EHD
FD
EHD
FD
GHB
3
GHQRSP GHQRSP HFD HFD
400 J T
3 GHB GHB
Note
3 1 Valid on two- and three-pole breakers only. Not valid for single-pole.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
480Y/277 Vac—Fuse/Breaker Series Ratings 600 Vac—Fuse/Breaker Series Ratings
Main fuse class shown at top in shaded area. Respective branch Main fuse class shown at top in shaded area. Respective branch 3
devices shown directly below. All ratings in this table apply to devices shown directly below. All ratings in this table apply to
two- and three-pole branch breakers only. Not valid for single- two- and three-pole branch breakers only. Not valid for single- 3
pole branch breakers. pole branch breakers.
Main Series Equipment Rating—kA Symmetrical Main Series Equipment Rating—kA Symmetrical 3
Fuse Fuse
Maximum
Amperes 65 100 200
Maximum
Amperes 100 200 3
100 J
GHBS
T
GHBS
R
GHB
100 R
FD, FDE
3
3
HFD, HFDE
200 J T R
FDC
GHBS GHBS GHB
J T R
3
200
400 J T
FD, FDE FD, FDE JD
GHB GHB HFD, HFDE HFD, HFDE HJD
600 J T
FDC FDC JDC 3
400 J T R
3
EHD GHB
FD, FDE EHD JD JD KD
HFD FD, FDE HJD HJD HKD
FDC
HFDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
JDC JDC KDC
3
600 J T
JD
HJD
JDC
KD
HKD
KD
HKD
3
3
KDC KDC
480 Vac—Fuse/Breaker Series Ratings Triple Series Ratings 3

Main fuse class shown at top in shaded area. Respective branch
devices shown directly below. All ratings in this table apply to Main Fuse
Short-
Circuit 3
two- and three-pole branch breakers only. Not valid for single- Class and Series
pole branch breakers. Maximum
Amperes
Tenant Main
Type
Branch
Type
System
Voltage
Rating
(kA, Sym.)
3
Main Fuse Series Equipment Rating—kA Symmetrical
Maximum
Amperes 100 200
L-6000 DK, KD, KDB GB, GHB, EHD 1 240 100 3
L-6000 DK, KD, KDB GB, GHB 120/240 100
100 R L-6000 DK, KD, KDB FD 1, FDB 240 100 3
EHD L-6000 DK, KD, KDB JD, JDB 240 100
200 J T L-6000 JD, JDB GB, GHB 240 100
3
3
EHD EHD L-6000 JD, JDB GB, GHB 120/240 100
FD FD
HFD HFD L-6000 FD GB, GHB 240 100
FDC FDC L-6000 FD GB, GHB 120/240 100 3
L-6000 FD, FDB BAB_H, HQP_H 240 100
QBHW_H, QPHW_H 3
L-6000 FD, FDB BA, BAB 120/240 100
HQP (15–70A)
3
L-6000 EHD BAB_H, HQP_H 240 100
L-6000 EHD BA, BAB, HQP 120/240 100 3
3
Note
1 Valid on two- and three-pole breakers only. Not valid for single-pole.
3
3
3
3
3
3
Contents
3 Type PRL1a
Description Page
3 Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-7
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-8
3 Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-10
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-11
3 Type PRL1a
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-27
3 Box Sizing and Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-28
Type PRL1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-30
3 Type PRL1a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-34
3
Type PRL2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-38
Type PRL2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-42
3 Type PRL2a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrofit Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-46
V2-T3-50
3 Type PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type PRL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-58
V2-T3-66
3 Type PRL4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-76
Type PRL5P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-86
3
3
3
3 Type PRL1a
3 Product Description
● 240 Vac maximum
● Lighting branch panelboard
Standards and Certifications
● UL 67, UL 50
3 ● Three-phase four-wire,
three-phase three-wire,
●
●
Fully rated or series rated
Interrupting ratings up to
● Federal Specification
W-P-115c
3
single-phase three-wire, 200 kA symmetrical ● Refer to Page V2-T3-7 for
single-phase two-wire ● Suitable for use as Service additional information
400A maximum mains
3
●
Entrance Equipment, when
● 100A maximum branch specified on the order
breakers
3 See Pages V2-T3-7
●
● Bolt-on or plug-on branch through V2-T3-23 for

breakers additional information
3 ● Each branch connector is
capable of up to a total of
3 140A maximum by breaker
ampere rating
3 ● Factory assembled
● Refer to Page V2-T3-7 for
3 additional information
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Product Selection
3
PRL1a
3
Type PRL1a PRL1a Branch Circuit Breakers
Interrupting Bolt-on = BAB, QBHW, QBGF, QBHGF, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP, QBAF, QBAG, QBHAF, QBHAG
Ampere Rating (kA Sym.) Breaker
3
Plug-on = HQP, QPHW, QPGF, QPHGF, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP
Rating 240 Vac Type
Interrupting
Main Lug Only Ampere Rating (kA Sym.) Breaker
100 — —
Rating 240 Vac 1 Type 3
15–60 10 BAB, HQP
225 — —
70 10 BAB, HQP
3
400 — —
Main Breaker 80–100 10 BAB, HQP
3
100 10 BAB 15–50 2 10 QBGF, QPGF 3
100 18 EHD 15–50 2 10 QBGFEP, QPGFEP 4 3

15–20 10 QBCAF 5
3
100 22 QBHW
100 22 EDB 15–60 10 BAB-D, HQP-D 6
3
15–30 10 BAB-C, HQP-B 7
100 42 EDS
100 65 ED 15–30 10 BABRP 8
100 65 FD, FDE 15–30 10 BABRSP 8

3
100 100 EDH 15–60 22 QBHW, QPHW
100 100 HFD, HFDE 70 22 QBHW, QPHW 3

80–100 22 QBHW, QPHW
225
225
22
42
EDB
EDS 15–30 22 QBHGF, QPHGF 3 3
225 65 ED 15–30
15–20
22
22
QBHGFEP, QPHGFEP 4
QBHCAF 5
3
225 100 EDH
250 65 JD Provision — — 3
250 100 HJD Notes
250 200 JDC
1 Single-pole breakers are rated 120 Vac maximum. 3
2 50A devices are available as two-pole only.
400 65 DK 3 GFCI for 5 mA personnel protection.
4 GFP for 30 mA equipment protection.
3
400 65 KD
3
5 Arc fault circuit breaker.
400 100 HKD 6 HID (High Intensity Discharge) rated breaker.
400 100 LHH 7 Switching Neutral Breaker. single-pole device requires two-pole space, two-pole device
400 200 KDC

requires three-pole space.
8 Solenoid operated breaker.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Box Sizing and Selection

3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3 Assembled Circuit
Breaker Panelboards and
Determine sub-feed
breaker or through-feed
Cabinets
Fronts are code-gauge
Lighting Controls
3 Box size and box and trim 3.
lug requirements.
Select the main ampere
steel, ANSI-61 light gray
painted finish.
catalog numbers for all rating section from table
3 standard panelboard on Page V2-T3-29. Boxes are code-gauge
types are found on galvanized steel without
4. Select panelboard type
3 Page V2-T3-29.
from first column, main
knockouts. Standard depth
is 5-3/4 inches (146.1 mm).
breaker frame, if Standard width is 20 inches
3 Instructions
1. Using description of the
applicable, from second (508.0 mm). An optional
column, and sub-feed 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide
required panelboard,
3 select the rating and
breaker frame, if
applicable, from the
box is available.
type of main required. third column.
3 2. Count the total number 5. From Step #2, determine
Top and Bottom Gutters
5-1/2 inches (139.7 mm)
of branch circuit poles, the number of branch
3 including provisions, circuits in Column 4.
minimum.
required in the
6. Read box size, box and
3 panelboard. Do not
count main breaker trim catalog numbers
poles. Convert two- across columns to the
3 or three-pole branch right. Specify surface
or flush mounting on
breaker to single-poles,
3 i.e., three-pole breaker,
count as three poles.
the order.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
PRL1a Panelboard Sizing 3
3
Main Breaker Types Sub-Feed Breaker Types Maximum No. of Box Dimensions 1
and Mounting Position and Mounting Position Branch Circuits YS Box LT Trim EZ Box EZ Trim
Panelboard (H) = Horizontal (H) = Horizontal Including Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Types
100A
(V) = Vertical (V) = Vertical Provisions Height Width Depth Number Number Number Number
3
Main breaker BAB, QBHW
(H)
— 15 36.00 (914.4) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2036 LT2036S or F EZB2036R EZT2036S or F 3
— 27 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F
3
Main lugs or EHD — 18 36.00 (914.4) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2036 LT2036S or F EZB2036R EZT2036S or F
main breaker FD, HFD
(V) — 30 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F
3
Main lugs or main
breaker with 100A
EHD
FD
EHD
FD
18 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F 3
30 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F
3
through-feed lugs or HFD HFD
sub-feed breaker (V) (V) 42 60.00 (1524.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2060 LT2060S or F EZB2060R EZT2060S or F
225A
Main lugs or EDB, EDS, ED, — 18 36.00 (914.4) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2036 LT2036S or F EZB2036R EZT2036S or F
3
main breaker EDH, FD, HFD
(V) — 30 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F 3
Main lugs or main FD, HFD, FD, HFD, 18 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F 3
breaker with 225A EDS, ED, EDS, ED,
throughfeed lugs or
sub-feed breaker
EDH
(V)
EDH
(V) 42 60.00 (1524.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2060 LT2060S or F EZB2060R EZT2060S or F 3
400A
Main breaker DK, KD, HKD, — 18 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F
3
3
KDC, LHH
Main lugs or main DK, KD, HKD, FD, HFD, 18 60.00 (1524.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2060 LT2060S or F EZB2060R EZT2060S or F 3
breaker with 225A KDC, LHH EDS, ED,
3
through-feed lugs or (V) EDH 30 60.00 (1524.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2060 LT2060S or F EZB2060R EZT2060S or F
sub-feed breaker (V) 42 72.00 (1828.8) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2072 LT2072S or F EZB2072R EZT2072S or F
Main breaker with 400A DK, KD, HKD,
through-feed lugs or KDC, LHH
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC
3
sub-feed breaker (V) (V) 30 72.00 (1828.8) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2072 LT2072S or F EZB2072R EZT2072S or F
3
Note
1 Smaller panelboard box sizes are available if required. Contact Eaton for application information.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Contents
3 Type PRL1aF
Description Page
3 Type PRL1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-26
Type PRL1aF
Box Sizing and Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-32
3 Type PRL1a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-34
3
Type PRL2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-38
Type PRL2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-42
3 Type PRL2a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-46
V2-T3-50
3 Type PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type PRL3E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-58
V2-T3-62
3 Type PRL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-66
Type PRL4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-76
3 Type PRL5P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-86
3
3
3 Type PRL1aF
● 240 Vac maximum
● Lighting branch
● UL 67, UL 50
3 ●
●
400A maximum mains
Three-phase four-wire, ●
panelboards
Instrument protection
3 ●
single-phase three-wire
30A maximum branch
●
●
Fully rated
3 ●
devices
Factory assembled
200 kA symmetrical when
protected by fuse
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Product Selection
3
Type PRL1aF PRL1aF 3
Interrupting
Rating (kA Sym.) 3
Ampere Rating 240 Vac Breaker Type
Main Lug Only 3
3
100 — —
225 — —
400 — —
3
Main Breaker
100 18 EHD 3
100 22 EDB
100 42 EDS 3
100
100
65
65
ED
FD
3
100 65 FDE 3
100 100 EDH
100 100 HFD 3
100 100 HFDE
225 22 EDB
3
225
225
42
65
EDS
ED
3
225 65 FD 3
225 65 FDE
225 100 EDH 3
3
225 100 HFD
225 100 HFDE
400 42 DK
3
400 65 KD
400 100 HKD 3
400 200 KDC
400 200 LHH 3
3
PRL1aF—Branch Overcurrent Devices
Hybrid breaker/fuse (Class CC) branch device 3
Ampere Rating Interrupting Rating Breaker Type 3
30 200 Hybrid
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

3 Assembled Circuit
Breaker Panelboards
Determine through-feed
lug requirements.
Cabinets
3 Box size and box and trim
catalog numbers for all
3. Select the main ampere
rating section from table
painted finish.
standard panelboard on Page V2-T3-33.
3 types are found on 4. Select panelboard type
Boxes are code-gauge
Page V2-T3-33. galvanized steel without
from first column, main
3 Instructions
breaker frame.
is 5-3/4 inches (146.1 mm).
5. From Step #2, determine Standard width is 20 inches
3 1. Using description of the
the number of branch (508.0 mm). An optional
circuits in Column 4. 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide
type of main required. 6. Read box size, box and box is available.
trim catalog numbers
3 2. Count the total number
of branch circuit poles,
across columns to the
right. Specify surface
5-1/2 inches (139.7 mm)
including provisions,
3 required in the
the order.
minimum.
panelboard.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3
3
PRL1aF Panelboard Sizing
Main Breaker Types Maximum No. of Box Dimensions 1
3
and Mounting Position Branch Circuits YS Box LT Trim EZ Box EZ Trim
Panelboard
Types
(H) = Horizontal
(V) = Vertical
Including
Provisions Height Width Depth
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
3
100A 3
Main lugs or EHD 18 36.00 (914.4) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2036 LT2036S or F EZB2036R EZT2036S or F
main breaker FD, HFD
FDE, HFDE 30 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F 3
(V)
3
Main lugs or main EHD 18 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F
breaker with 100A FD, FDE
through-feed lugs HFD, HFDE
(V)
3
225A 3
Main lugs or EDB, EDS, ED, 18 36.00 (914.4) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2036 LT2036S or F EZB2036R EZT2036S or F
(V)
Main lugs or main FD, HFD,

42
18
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
YS2048
YS2048
LT2048S or F
LT2048S or F
EZB2048R
EZB2048R
EZT2048S or F
EZT2048S or F
3
breaker with 225A EDS, ED,
through-feed lugs EDH, FDE, HFDE
(V)
400A 3
Main breaker DK, KD, HKD, 18 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F
KDC, LHH
Main lugs or main DK, KD, HKD,

42
18
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
YS2060
YS2060
LT2060S or F
LT2060S or F
EZB2060R
EZB2060R
EZT2060S or F
EZT2060S or F
3
3
breaker with 225A KDC, LHH
through-feed lugs (V) 30 60.00 (1524.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2060 LT2060S or F EZB2060R EZT2060S or F
Main breaker with 400A DK, KD, HKD, 18 72.00 (1828.8) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2072 LT2072S or F EZB2072R EZT2072S or F 3
through-feed lugs KDC, LHH
3
(V) 30 72.00 (1828.8) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2072 LT2072S or F EZB2072R EZT2072S or F
Note
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Contents
3 Type PRL1a-LX, Column Type
Description Page
3 Type PRL1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-26
Type PRL1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-30
3 Type PRL1a-LX
3
Type PRL2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-38
Type PRL2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-42
3 Type PRL2a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-46
V2-T3-50
3 Type PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type PRL3E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-58
V2-T3-62
3 Type PRL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-66
Type PRL4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-76
3 Type PRL5P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-86
3
3
3 Type PRL1a-LX
● 240 Vac maximum
● UL 67, UL 50
3 ● Three-phase four-wire,
three-phase three-wire,
●
●
Column mounting width
W-P-115c
3
single-phase three-wire, ● Interrupting ratings up to ● Refer to Page V2-T3-7 for
single-phase two-wire 200 kA symmetrical additional information
225A maximum mains
3
●
● See Pages V2-T3-7
● 100A maximum branch through V2-T3-23 for
breakers
3 ● Bolt-on branch breakers
additional information
3 Factory assembled
●

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Product Selection
3
PRL1a-LX Pull Box With Extension Trough
Type PRL1a-LX
Interrupting Includes pull box with trough extension. For additional trough 3
Ampere Rating (kA Sym.) Breaker extensions, refer to table below.
Rating 240 Vac Type 3
Catalog
Main Lug Only
100 — —
Description Number
3
Pullbox with 36-inch trough XCTXB036
3
225 — —
Main Breaker
100
100
10
18
BAB
EHD
Pullbox with 72-inch trough XCTXB072 3
100 22 QBHW Pullbox with 84-inch trough XCTXB084
3
100 22 EDB
Neutral Bars
100 42 EDS
When Column Type panels are furnished with trough extensions 3
100 65 ED and pull box, the neutral bar will be placed in the pull box unless
100 65 FD otherwise specified. 3
100 100 EDH
100 100 HFD
When troughs and pull box are not furnished, the neutral bar will
be located on the panel at the same end as the main. 3
3
255 22 EDB
255 42 EDS
Additional Trough Extensions
225
225
65
100
ED
EDH Width and depth are the same as the panelboard. 3
Length Catalog 3
Inches (mm) Number
Branch Circuit Breakers—PRL1a-LX
3
1
36.00 (914.4) CTXB036
Interrupting
48.00 (1219.2) CTXB048
3
Ampere Rating (kA Sym.) Breaker
Rating 240 Vac 2 Type
60.00 (1524.0) CTXB060
15–60 10 BAB
70 10 BAB
72.00 (1828.8) CTXB072
3
84.00 (2133.6) CTXB084
80–100
15–50 3
10
10
BAB
QBGF 4 Notes 3
1 240V breakers must be used on three-phase, three-wire, 240V delta systems or on the high
15–50
15–20
3 10
10
QBGFEP
QBCAF 6
5
leg of a midpoint delta grounded system.
2 Single-pole breakers are rated 120 Vac maximum.
3
3
3 50A devices are available as two-pole only.
15–30 10 BABRP 7
4 GFCI for 5 mA personnel protection.
15–30 10 BABRSP 7 5 GFP for 30 mA equipment protection.
15–60 22 QBHW 6 Arc fault circuit breaker.

7 Solenoid operated breaker.
3
70 22 QBHW
80–100 22 QBHW 3
15–30 22 QBHGF 4
15–30 22 QBHGFEP 5 3
3
15–20 22 QBHCAF 6
Provision — —
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

3 Assembled Circuit Breaker 4. Panelboard Type from Pull Box

Panelboards first column, main Pull box is furnished without
3 Box size, box and trim catalog breaker Frame and knockouts. Standard dimensions:
numbers for standard Column Designation, if applicable
3 Type panelboards listed are
available from tables on
from second column, and
sub-feed breaker Frame
Pull Box Dimensions
Height Width Depth
3 Page V2-T3-37. and Designation, if
applicable, from the third 12.00 (304.8) 16.00 (406.4) 6.00 (152.4)
Instructions column.
3 1. Using description of the 5. From Step #2, determine
required panelboard, PRL1a-LX Trough Extension
the number of branch
circuits in Column 4. 6.00 16.00
type of main required. (406.4)
3
(152.4)
a. 100A panelboards— trim catalog numbers 12.00
Page V2-T3-37.
3 b. 225A panelboards—
right. All panels are
(304.8)
Page V2-T3-37. surface mounted.

3 Additional
Extensions
2. Count the total number Cabinets (If Required)
3 of branch circuit poles,
including provisions, Boxes and trims are code-
gauge steel, ANSI-61 light
3
required in the
panelboard. Do not count gray painted finish.
main breaker poles. Boxes are furnished without
3 Convert two- or three- knockouts. Standard depth
H
Box
pole branch breaker to is 6.00 inches (152.4 mm). Height
3 single poles, i.e., three-
pole breaker, count as
Standard width is
8.63 inches (219.1 mm). 6.00 8.63
3 three poles. Determine
sub-feed breaker or Top and Bottom Gutters
(152.4) (219.1)
through-feed lug
3 requirements.
4.50 inches (114.3 mm)
minimum.
Trough Extension
When extension troughs are
3 3. Select the panelboard
main ampere rating Left Side Gutter
used, Section 376 of the
National Electrical Code,
4.38 inches (111.2 mm)
3
from tables on reading as follows, should be
Page V2-T3-37. minimum. observed: 376. Number of
Conductors. Wireways shall
3 not contain more than 30
conductors at any cross
3 section, unless the
conductors are for signal
3 circuits or are control
conductors between a motor
3 and its starter and used only
for starting duty. The sum
of the cross-sectional areas of
3 all contained conductors
at any cross section of a
3 wireway shall not exceed
20% of the interior cross-
3 sectional area of the wireway.
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
3
100A Maximum PRL1a-LX Column Type Panelboard Sizing
Maximum Box Dimensions
3
Main Breaker Number
Types
Mounting:
Sub-Feed
Breaker Types
of Branch
Circuits Box Trim
3
3
Panelboard (H) = Horizontal Vertical Including Catalog Catalog
Types (V) = Vertical Mounting Provisions Height Width Depth Number Number 1
3
Main breaker BAB, QBHW — 27 69.00 (1752.6) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC969 LTC969S
(H)
— 39 81.00 (2057.4) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC981 LTC981S
Main lugs or main breaker EHD, EDB, EDS,
ED, FD, HFD
— 30 69.00 (1752.6) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC969 LTC969S
3
— 42 81.00 (2057.4) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC981 LTC981S
(V)
Main lugs or main breaker EHD, EDB, EDS, EHD, FD, HFD 30 78.00 (1981.2) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC978 LTC978S 3
with 100A through-feed lugs ED, FD, HFD
or sub-feed breaker (V)
42 90.00 (2286.0) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC990 LTC990S
3
3
225A Maximum PRL1a-LX Column Type Panelboard Sizing
Main Breaker Sub-Feed Maximum 3
Types Breaker Types Number Box Dimensions Inches
of Branch
Circuits Box Trim 3
Panelboard Including Catalog Catalog
Types Vertical Mounting Provisions Height Width Depth Number Number 1
3
Main lugs or main breaker EDB, EDS, — 30 69.00 (1752.6) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC969 LTC969S
ED, EDH
— 42 81.00 (2057.4) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC981 LTC981S 3
Main lugs or main breaker EDB, EDS, EHD, FD, HFD, EDB, 30 78.00 (1981.2) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC978 LTC978S
with 225A through-feed lugs ED, EDH EDS, ED, EDH
42 90.00 (2286.0) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC990 LTC990S
3
or sub-feed breaker
Note 3
1 Add suffix B to trim catalog number for bottom fed panelboards (i.e., LTC969SB).
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Contents
3 Type PRL2a
Description Page
3 Type PRL1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-26
Type PRL1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-30
3 Type PRL1a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-34
Type PRL2a
3 Type PRL2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-42
3 Type PRL2a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-46
V2-T3-50
3 Type PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type PRL3E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-58
V2-T3-62
3 Type PRL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-66
Type PRL4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-76
3 Type PRL5P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-86
3
3
3 Type PRL2a
● 480Y/277 Vac maximum
● UL 67, UL 50
3 ●
(125 Vdc)
Three-phase four-wire,
●
●
W-P-115c
3
three-phase three-wire, 200 kA symmetrical ● Refer to Page V2-T3-7 for
single-phase three-wire, ● Suitable for use as Service additional information
single-phase two-wire
3 ● 400A maximum mains
Entrance Equipment, when
specified on the order
● 100A maximum branch
3 See Pages V2-T3-7
●
breakers through V2-T3-23 for

● Bolt-on branch breakers additional information
3 ● Each branch connector is
capable of up to a total of
3 140A maximum by breaker
ampere rating
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Product Selection
3
PRL2a PRL2a Branch Circuit Breakers
Type PRL2a
Interrupting Rating Interrupting Rating
3
Ampere (kA Symmetrical) (kA Symmetrical)
Rating 240 Vac 480Y/277 Vac 125/250 Vdc
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating 240 Vac 1 480Y/277 Vac 125/250 Vdc
Breaker
Type
3
Main Lug Only
100 — — — —
15–20 65 14 — GHQ 2 3
15–20 65 14 14 GHB 2
225 — — — — 25–60 65 14 14 GHB 2 3
400 — — — — 70–100 65 14 14 GHB 2
Main Breaker 15–30 65 25 — HGHB 2
3
100 65 14 14 GHB
100 18 14 10 EHD
15–20 65 14 — GHQRSP 3
3
15–30 65 14 — GHBS 23
100 65 35 10 FD, FDE 15–60 — 14 — GHBGFEP 24 3
100 100 65 22 HFD, HFDE 15–20 — 14 — GHBHID 25
100 200 100 22 FDC Provision — — — — 3
225 65 — — ED
225 65 35 10 FD, FDE
Notes
1 Interrupting ratings in this column are applicable to 120 Vac for single-pole breakers.
3
3
225 100 65 22 HFD, HFDE 2 Must be used on 480Y/277V grounded wye systems only.
3 Remote controllable breaker.
225 200 100 22 FDC
4 GFP for 30 mA equipment protection. Requires two-pole spaces. 277 Vac only.
250 65 35 10 JD 5 HID (High Intensity Discharge) rated breaker.
3
250 100 65 22 HJD
250 200 100 22 JDC 3
400 65 35 10 KD
400 100 65 22 HKD 3
400
400
100
200
65
100
—
22
LHH
KDC
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

3 Assembled Circuit
Breaker Panelboards and
Determine sub-feed
breaker or through-feed
Cabinets
Lighting Controls
3 Box size and box and trim 3.
lug requirements.
Select the main ampere
painted finish.
3 standard panelboard
on Page V2-T3-41. Boxes are code-gauge
types are found on galvanized steel without
3 Page V2-T3-41. 4. Select panelboard
type from first column,
is 5-3/4 inches (146.1 mm).
main breaker frame, if
3 Instructions
1. Using description of the
applicable, from second
Standard width is 20 inches
(508.0 mm). An optional
column, and sub-feed
28-inch (711.2 mm) wide
3
required panelboard, breaker frame, if
select the rating and box is available.
type of main required.
3
third column.
2. Count the total number 5. From Step #2, determine
of branch circuit poles, 5-1/2 inches (139.7 mm)
3
including provisions, minimum.
circuits in Column 4.
required in the
3 panelboard. Do not
count main breaker trim catalog numbers
poles. Convert two- across columns to the
3 or three-pole branch right. Specify surface
breaker to single-poles, or flush mounting on
3 i.e., three-pole breaker, the order.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
3
PRL2a Panelboard Sizing
3
Panelboard
Types
(H) = Horizontal
(V) = Vertical
(H) = Horizontal
(V) = Vertical
Including
Catalog Catalog
Number Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
3
100A 3
Main breaker GHB — 15 36.00 (914.4) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2036 LT2036S or F EZB2036R EZT2036S or F
(H)
3
Main lugs or
main breaker
EHD
FD, HFD, FDE
3
HFDE — 30 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F
Main lugs or main breaker EHD EHD 18 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F
with 100A through-feed FD, FDE
lugs or sub-feed breaker HFD, HFDE
FD
HFD 30 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F 3
(V) (V)
225A
3
Main lugs or
main breaker
EDB, EDS, ED,
EDH, FD, HFD
FDE, HFDE — 30 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F
JD, HJD — 18 60.00 (1524.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2060 LT2060S or F EZB2060R EZT2060S or F
JDC
Main lugs or main breaker EHD, FD, HFD,

—
EHD, FD, HFD,
42
18
72.00 (1828.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
YS2072
YS2048
LT2072S or F
LT2048S or F
EZB2072R
EZB2048R
EZT2072S or F
EZT2048S or F
3
3
with 225A through-feed EDB, EDS, ED, EDB, EDS, ED,
lugs or sub-feed breaker EDH EDH (V) 30 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F
FDE, HFDE 42 60.00 (1524.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2060 LT2060S or F EZB2060R EZT2060S or F
(V)
3
JD, HJD EHD, FD, HFD, 18 60.00 (1524.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2060 LT2060S or F EZB2060R EZT2060S or F
JDC
(V)
EDB, EDS, ED,
EDH (V) 30 72.00 (1828.8) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2072 LT2072S or F EZB2072R EZT2072S or F 3
400A 3
3
Main lugs or DK, KD, HKD, — 18 60.00 (1524.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2060 LT2060S or F EZB2060R EZT2060S or F
main breaker KDC, LHH
3
Main lugs or main breaker DK, KD, HKD, EHD, FD, HFD, 18 60.00 (1524.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2060 LT2060S or F EZB2060R EZT2060S or F
with 225A through-feed KDC, LHH
lugs or sub-feed breaker (V)
EDB, EDS, ED,
EDH (V) 30 72.00 (1828.8) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2072 LT2072S or F EZB2072R EZT2072S or F 3
Main lugs or main breaker DK, KD, HKD, JD, HJD, JDC, 18 72.00 (1828.8) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2072 LT2072S or F EZB2072R EZT2072S or F 3
with 400A through-feed KDC, LHH DK, KD,
lugs or sub-feed breaker (V) HKD, KDC
(V)
30
42
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
YS2090
YS2090
LT2090S or F
LT2090S or F
EZB2090R
EZB2090R
EZT2090S or F
EZT2090S or F
3
Note 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Contents
3 Type PRL2aF
Description Page
3 Type PRL1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-26
Type PRL1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-30
3 Type PRL1a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-34
Type PRL2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-38
3 Type PRL2aF
3 Type PRL2a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-46
V2-T3-50
3 Type PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type PRL3E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-58
V2-T3-62
3 Type PRL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-66
Type PRL4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-76
3 Type PRL5P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-86
3
3
3 Type PRL2aF
● 240 Vac maximum
● UL 67, UL 50
3 ●
●
400A maximum mains
●
●
Instrument protection
Fully rated
3 ●
single-phase three-wire
30A maximum branch
● Interrupting ratings up to
200 kA symmetrical when
3 ●
devices
Factory assembled
protected by fuse
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Product Selection
3
Type PRL2aF PRL2aF 3
Interrupting
Rating (kA Sym.) 3
Ampere Rating 480Y/277 Vac Breaker Type
Main Lug Only 3
3
100 — —
225 — —
400 — —
3
Main Breaker
100 14 EHD 3
100 35 FD
100 35 FDE 3
100
100
35
35
HFD
HFDE
3
225 35 FD 3
225 35 FDE
225 65 HFD 3
225 65 HFDE
400 35 KD
3
400
400
65
100
HKD
KDC
3
400 100 LHH 3
3
PRL2aF Branch Overcurrent Devices
Hybrid breaker/fuse (Class CC) branch device 3
Interrupting
Rating (kA Sym.) 3
Ampere Rating 480Y/277 Vac Breaker Type
30 200 Hybrid 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

3 Assembled Circuit
Breaker Panelboards
Determine through-feed
lug requirements.
Cabinets
3 Box size and box and trim
painted finish.
standard panelboard
3 types are found on
4.
on Page V2-T3-45.
Select panelboard
Page V2-T3-45. galvanized steel without
3 Instructions
type from first column,
main breaker frame,
is 5-3/4 inches (146.1 mm).
if applicable, from
3 1. Using description of the
second column.
Standard width is 20 inches
5. From Step #2, determine 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide
type of main required. the number of branch box is available.
circuits in Column 4.
of branch circuit poles, 6. Read box size, box and Top and Bottom Gutters
including provisions, trim catalog numbers 5-1/2 inches (139.7 mm)
3 required in the across columns to the
minimum.
panelboard.
3
the order.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
3
PRL2aF Panelboard Sizing
Main Breaker Types Maximum No. of Box Dimensions 1
3
and Mounting Position Branch Circuits YS Box LT Trim EZ Box EZ Trim
Panelboard
Types
(H) = Horizontal
(V) = Vertical
Including
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
3
100A 3
Main lugs or EHD 18 36.00 (914.4) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2036 LT2036S or F EZB2036R EZT2036S or F
main breaker FD, HFD, FDE
HFDE 30 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F 3
(V)
3
Main lugs or main breaker EHD 18 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F
with 100A through-feed FD, FDE
lugs or sub-feed breaker HFD, HFDE
(V)
3
225A 3
Main lugs or EDB, EDS, ED, 18 36.00 (914.4) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2036 LT2036S or F EZB2036R EZT2036S or F
(V)
JD, HJD
42
18
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
YS2048
YS2060
LT2048S or F
LT2060S or F
EZB2048R
EZB2060R
EZT2048S or F
EZT2060S or F
3
3
JDC
Main lugs or main breaker EHD, FD, HFD, 18 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F 3
with 225A through-feed EDB, EDS, ED, EDH
lugs FDE, HFDE
JD, HJD
JDC
18
30
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
YS2060
YS2072
LT2060S or F
LT2072S or F
EZB2060R
EZB2072R
EZT2060S or F
EZT2072S or F
3
(V)
400A
Main lugs or KD, HKD, 18 60.00 (1524.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2060 LT2060S or F EZB2060R EZT2060S or F 3
main breaker KDC, LHH
3
Main lugs or main breaker KD, HKD,
3
lugs (V) 30 72.00 (1828.8) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2072 LT2072S or F EZB2072R EZT2072S or F
Main lugs or main breaker KD, HKD, 18 72.00 (1828.8) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2072 LT2072S or F EZB2072R EZT2072S or F
lugs (V) 30 90.00 (2286.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2090 LT2090S or F EZB2090R EZT2090S or F 3
3
Note
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Contents
3 Type PRL2a-LX, Column Type
Description Page
3 Type PRL1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-26
Type PRL1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-30
3 Type PRL1a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-34
Type PRL2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-38
3 Type PRL2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-42
Type PRL2a-LX
3 Box Sizing and Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V2-T3-48
V2-T3-50
3 Type PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type PRL3E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-58
V2-T3-62
3 Type PRL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-66
Type PRL4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-76
3 Type PRL5P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-86
3
3
3 Type PRL2a-LX
● 480Y/277 Vac maximum
● UL 67, UL 50
3 ●
(125 Vdc)
●
●
Column mounting width
W-P-115c
3
three-phase three-wire, ● Interrupting ratings up to ● Refer to Page V2-T3-7 for
single-phase three-wire, 200 kA symmetrical additional information
3 ● 225A maximum mains
● See Pages V2-T3-7
through V2-T3-23 for
3 breakers
● Bolt-on branch breakers

Refer to Refer to Page V2-
3
●
T3-7 for additional

information
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Product Selection
3
PRL2a-LX
3
Type PRL2a-LX Pull Box With
Interrupting Rating (kA Extension Trough
Symmetrical) Includes pull box with trough
Ampere 480Y/277 125/250 Breaker extension. For additional 3
Rating 240 Vac Vac Vdc Type trough extensions, refer to
Main Lug Only
table below. 3
Catalog
3
100 — — — —
Description Number
225 — — — —
Main Breaker
Pullbox with 48-inch trough XCTXB048 3
100 65 14 14 GHB
3
100 18 14 10 EHD
100 65 35 10 FD, FDE
100 100 65 22 HFD, HFDE
3
100
225
200
65
100
—
22
—
FDC
ED
Neutral Bars
When Column Type panels
3
225 65 35 10 FD
are furnished with trough
extensions and pull box, the 3
225 100 65 22 HFD neutral bar will be placed in
225 200 100 22 FDC the pull box unless otherwise 3
specified.
When troughs and pull box are 3
Branch Circuit Breakers—PRL2a-LX not furnished, the neutral bar
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) will be located on the panel at 3
Ampere 240 480Y/277 125/250 Breaker the same end as the main.
Rating Vac 1 Vac Vdc Type 3
15–20 65 14 — GHQ 2 Additional Trough
15–20 65 14 14 GHB 2
Extensions 3
Width and depth are the
3
25–60 65 14 14 GHB 2
same as the panelboard.
70–100 65 14 14 GHB 2 Length Catalog
15–30 65 25 — HGHB 2 Inches (mm) Number 3
15–20 65 14 — GHQRSP 3 36.00 (914.4) CTXB036
15–30 65 14 — GHBS 23 48.00 (1219.2) CTXB048 3
3
15–60 — 14 — GHBGFEP 24 60.00 (1524.0) CTXB060
Provision — — — — 72.00 (1828.8) CTXB072
84.00 (2133.6) CTXB084 3
Notes
1 Interrupting ratings in this column are 3
applicable to 120 Vac for single-pole
breakers.
2 At 480V, must be used on 480Y/277V
3
grounded wye systems only.
3 Solenoid operated breaker. 3
Requires two pole spaces.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3

3 Assembled Circuit Breaker 4. Panelboard Type from Pull Box

Panelboards first column, main Pull box is furnished without
3 Box size, box and trim catalog breaker Frame and knockouts. Standard dimensions:
numbers for standard column Designation, if applicable
3 type panelboards listed are
available from tables on
from second column, and
sub-feed breaker Frame
Pull Box Dimensions
Height Width Depth
3 Page V2-T3-49. and Designation, if
applicable, from the third 12.00 (304.8) 16.00 (406.4) 6.00 (152.4)
Instructions column.
3 1. Using description of the 5. From Step #2, determine
required panelboard, PRL2a-LX Trough Extension
circuits in Column 4. 6.00 16.00
type of main required.
3 (152.4) (406.4)
a. 100A panelboards— trim catalog numbers 12.00
Page V2-T3-49.
3 b. 225A panelboards—
right. All panels are
(304.8)
Page V2-T3-49. surface mounted.

3 Additional
Extensions
2. Count the total number Cabinets (If Required)
3 of branch circuit poles,
including provisions, Boxes and trims are code-
gauge steel, ANSI-61 light
3
required in the
panelboard. Do not gray painted finish.
count main breaker Boxes are furnished without
3 poles. Convert two- knockouts. Standard depth H
Box
or three-pole branch is 6.00 inches (152.4 mm).
3
Height
breaker to single poles, Standard width is
i.e., three-pole breaker, 8.63 inches (219.1 mm).
6.00 8.63
3 count as three poles.
(152.4) (219.1)
Determine sub-feed
3 breaker or through-feed 4.50 inches (114.3 mm)
minimum.
Trough Extension
lug requirements. When extension troughs are
3 3. Select the panelboard Left Side Gutter
used, Section 376 of the
main ampere rating National Electrical Code,
3.31 inches (84.2 mm)
3 from tables on minimum.
reading as follows, should be
observed: 376. Number of
Page V2-T3-49.
Conductors. Wireways shall
3 not contain more than 30
conductors at any cross
3 section, unless the
conductors are for signal
3 circuits or are control
conductors between a motor
3 and its starter and used only
for starting duty. The sum
of the cross-sectional areas of
3 all contained conductors at
any cross section of a
3 wireway shall not exceed
20% of the interior cross-
3 sectional area of the wireway.
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
100A Maximum PRL2a-LX Column Type Panelboard Sizing 3
Main Breaker
Maximum
Number
Box Dimensions
3
Types Sub-Feed of Branch
Panelboard
Mounting:
(H) = Horizontal
Breaker Types
Vertical
Circuits
Including
Box
Catalog
Trim
Catalog
3
Number 1
3
Types (V) = Vertical Mounting Provisions Height Width Depth Number
Main breaker GHB — 27 69.00 (1752.6) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC969 LTC969S
(H)
— 39 81.00 (2057.7) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC981 LTC981S
3
Main lugs or main breaker EHD, FD — 30 69.00 (1752.6) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC969 LTC969S
HFD, FDC
(V)
— 42 81.00 (2057.7) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC981 LTC981S 3
Main lugs or main breaker
with 100A through-feed lugs
EHD, FD
HFD, FDC
EHD, FD, HFD 30
42
78.00 (1981.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
8.63 (219.2)
8.63 (219.2)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
YSC978
YSC990
LTC978S
LTC990S
3
or sub-feed breaker (V)
3
225A Maximum PRL2a-LX Column Type Panelboard Sizing 3
Main Breaker Sub-Feed Maximum
Types Breaker Types Number
of Branch
Box Dimensions 3
3
Circuits Box Trim
Panelboard Including Catalog Catalog
Types Vertical Mounting Provisions Height Width Depth Number Number 1
Main lugs or main breaker ED, FD — 30 69.00 (1752.6) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC969 LTC969S 3
HFD, FDC
— 42 81.00 (2057.7) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC981 LTC981S
Main lugs or main breaker ED, FD EHD, FD, HFD, 30 78.00 (1981.2) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC978 LTC978S
3
with 225A through-feed lugs HFD, FDC ED, EDH
or sub-feed breaker
42 90.00 (2286.0) 8.63 (219.2) 6.00 (152.4) YSC990 LTC990S
3
Note
1 Add suffix B to trim catalog number for bottom fed panelboards (i.e., LTC969SB). 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Contents
3 Retrofit Panelboard
Description Page
3 Type PRL1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-26
Type PRL1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-30
3 Type PRL1a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-34
Type PRL2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-38
3 Type PRL2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-42
Type PRL2a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-46
3 Retrofit Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-50
3 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-51
V2-T3-52
3 Trim Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Trim Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-54
V2-T3-55
3 Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-56
Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-57
3 Type PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-58
Type PRL3E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-62
3 Type PRL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-66
Type PRL4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-76
3 Type PRL5P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-86
3 Retrofit Panelboard
● PRL1R—240 Vac;
● UL 67
3 ●
PRL2R—480Y/277V
Single-phase three-wire or
●
●
Interrupting capacities to
W-P-115c
3
single two-wire 100 kA symmetrical ● CSA C22.2 No. 29
● Three-phase three-wire or ● Suitable for use as
three-phase four-wire
3 ● 225A maximum
Service Entrance
Equipment where
specified on the order
3 100A maximum branch
●
breakers
3 Standard PRL1R fits

●
existing box depths from

4.50–6.00 inches deep;
3 Standard PRL2R fits
existing box depths from
3 4.75–6.00 inches deep
(without additional
3 ●
accessories)
Integrally mounted neutral
3 ●
assembly
Grounding lug included
3 ● Neutral and ground
convertible from left-right
3 ●
●
Bolt-on branch breakers
Factory assembled
3
3
3
3
3.3
Catalog Number Selection
3
Retrofit Panelboard 3
P1R B 1 C 1 30 BAB 100 TL B 3
Panelboard Type Feed 3
P1R = ≤ 240V Main Device B = Bottom fed
P2R = > 480Y/277V L = MLO
B = Main breaker Bus Type Main Breaker
Main Breaker
Amperes
T = Top fed
3
3
A = Aluminum Blank = MLO Blank = MLO Sub-Feed Device
System Type C = Copper BAB 30 = 30A Blank = None
GHB 1 60 = 60A TL = Through-feed lugs
1 = Single-phase
(three-wire)
3 = Three-phase
Bus Ampere
Rating
ED
FD
100 = 100A
125 = 125A 3
EHD 1 150 = 150A
3
(three- or four-wire) 1 = 100A
FD 1 175 = 175A
2 = 225A 200 = 200A
225 = 225A
Circuits 3
18 = 18
30 = 30
42 = 42
3
3
3
Trim Selection
RCT B 20 00 36 50 F S 3
3
Renovation
Panelboard
Custom Trim
Door Style Trim Style 3
A = 18-circuit MLO/ Existing Box S = Surface
RCT branch-mounted MCB
B = 30-circuit MLO/
Width (Inches) Existing Box
Height (Inches)
F = Flush 2
3
branch-mounted MCB; Existing Box
3
Trim Finish Option 3
18-circuit F-Frame MCB Width Existing Box
C = 42-circuit MLO/ Blank = ANSI 61 painted steel
(Fraction) Height S = Brushed stainless steel 4
branch-mounted MCB
D = 30-circuit F-Frame MCB 00 = None
13 = 1/8
(Fraction)
00 = None
P
C
= Custom painted steel
= Custom painted stainless steel
3
E = 42-circuit F-Frame MCB
25 = 1/4 13 = 1/8
38 = 3/8
50 = 1/2
25 = 1/4
38 = 3/8
3
3
63 = 5/8 50 = 1/2
75 = 3/4 63 = 5/8
88 = 7/8 75 = 3/4
88 = 7/8
3
Notes
1 P2R only.
3
3
2 Flush trims include 1-inch overlap per side.
3 Standard trim includes 12-gauge steel painted ANSI 61 grey.
4 Stainless trims provided as 304 standard. Optional 316 available.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Product Selection
3
3 Retrofit Panelboard P1R—Aluminum Bus, Single-Phase or Three-Phase 1
Single-Phase Three-Wire— Three-Phase Three-Wire—
3
Single-Phase Two-Wire Three-Phase Four-Wire
Main
Ampere Number of Interrupting Rating Breaker Catalog Catalog
Rating Circuits (kA Sym.) 240 Vac Type Number Number
3 Main Lug Only
3 100 18 — MLO P1RL1A118 P1RL3A118

30 — MLO P1RL1A130 P1RL3A130
3 42 — MLO P1RL1A142 P1RL3A142
225 18 — MLO P1RL1A218 P1RL3A218
3 30 — MLO P1RL1A230 P1RL3A230
3 Main Breaker
42 — MLO P1RL1A242 P1RL3A242
3 100 18 10 BAB 2 P1RB1A118BAB 3 P1RB3A118BAB 3

30 10 BAB 2 P1RB1A130BAB 3 P1RB3A130BAB 3
3 42 10 BAB 2 P1RB1A142BAB 3 P1RB3A142BAB 3
18 18 EHD P1RB1A118EHD 3 P1RB3A118EHD 3
3 30 18 EHD P1RB1A130EHD 3 P1RB3A130EHD 3
3 42 18 EHD P1RB1A142EHD 3 P1RB3A142EHD 3

18 22 QBHW 2 P1RB1A118QBHW 3 P1RB3A118QBHW 3
3 30 22 QBHW 2 P1RB1A130QBHW 3 P1RB3A130QBHW 3

42 22 QBHW 2 P1RB1A142QBHW 3 P1RB3A142QBHW 3
3 18 65 ED P1RB1A118ED 3 P1RB3A118ED 3
3
30 65 ED P1RB1A130ED 3 P1RB3A130ED 3
42 65 ED P1RB1A142ED 3 P1RB3A142ED 3
3 18 100 EDH P1RB1A118EDH 3 P1RB3A1-8EDH 3

30 100 EDH P1RB1A130EDH 3 P1RB3A130EDH 3
3 42 100 EDH P1RB1A142EDH 3 P1RB3A142EDH 3
225 18 65 ED P1RB1A218ED 3 P1RB3A218ED 3
3 30 65 ED P1RB1A230ED 3 P1RB3A230ED 3
3 42
18
65
100
ED
EDH
P1RB1A242ED 3
P1RB1A218EDH 3
P1RB3A242ED 3
P1RB3A218EDH 3
3 30 100 EDH P1RB1A230EDH 3 P1RB3A230EDH 3

42 100 EDH P1RB1A242EDH 3 P1RB3A242EDH 3
3 Notes
1 Standard trim included. Select standard trim from Page V2-T3-54. Custom trims are available for an additional charge. Contact your local Satellite for more
3 information about custom trims.

2 BAB and QBHW main devices consume available circuit space positions. (Two circuits for single-phase; three circuits for three-phase.)
3 3 Add main breaker ampere rating suffix. May NOT exceed main bus rating.
A neutral assembly is included with the base chassis. For single-phase two-wire systems or for three-phase, three-wire systems, do not connect.
3 Sum of branch circuit amperes not to exceed 140A.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
3
P2R—Aluminum Bus, Three-Phase
Retrofit Panelboard
Three-Phase Four-Wire
3
Main
Ampere
Rating
Number of
Circuits
Main Breaker Interrupting
Rating (kA Sym.) 480Y/277 Vac
Breaker
Type
Catalog
Number
3
Main Lug Only 3
100 18 — MLO P2RL3A118
30 — MLO P2RL3A130 3
42 — MLO P2RL3A142
225 18 — MLO P2RL3A218
3
30 — MLO P2RL3A230
3
42 — MLO P2RL3A242
Main Breaker 3
100 18 14 GHB 1 P2RB3A118GHB 2
30 14 GHB 1 P2RB3A130GHB 2 3
3
42 14 GHB 1 P2RB3A142GHB 2
18 14 EHD P2RB3A118EHD 2
3
18 35 FD P2RB3A118FD 2 3
30 35 FD P2RB3A130FD 2
42 35 FD P2RB3A142FD 2 3
3
18 65 HFD P2RB3A118HFD 2
42 65 HFD P2RB3A142HFD 2 3
18 100 FDC P2RB3A118FDC 2
30 100 FDC P2RB3A130FDC 2 3
225 18 35 FD P2RB3A218FD 2
3
3
30 35 FD P2RB3A230FD 2
42 35 FD P2RB3A242FD 2
18 65 HFD P2RB3A218HFD 2 3
42 65 HFD P2RB3A242HFD 2 3
3
3
Notes
1 GHB main devices consume available circuit space positions. (Three circuits for three-phase).
2 Add main breaker ampere rating suffix. May NOT exceed main bus rating.
3
A neutral assembly is included with the base chassis. 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Trim Selection
3
Instructions
3 ● In order to meet minimum panelboard to be renovated be installed. These ● Page V2-T3-56 provides a
wire bending space (i.e., main breaker or main dimensions assume that “Trim Door Size Code.”
3 requirements and to lugs, amperes, interrupting the chassis is mounted in Using this code, select a
ensure ease of installation, rating, circuit space, branch the center of the existing standard trim from the
3 minimum enclosure space
dimensions have been
breakers, accessories) box, both vertically and
horizontally. Where site
tables that will fit the
outside dimensions of the
● Using the electrical
3 defined for each chassis.
In order to ensure a proper
requirement data, select
a base chassis and any
conditions require the
chassis to be offset from
existing box. Refer to Page
V2-T3-55 to define non-
fit, every panelboard to this centrally mounted standard trim requirements
3
required breakers, options
be renovated must be and accessories position, it is the installer's
carefully surveyed prior Page V2-T3-56 provides responsibility to ensure
3
●
to installation the minimum dimensions wire bending space and
● Determine the electrical of the enclosure, in which electrical clearance
3 requirements of the each base chassis may requirements are met
3 Standard Trim Selection—20-Inch (508.0 mm) Wide Enclosure
3 Trim Door Enclosure Height—

Surface Type
Catalog Trim Dimensions—Inches (mm)
Flush Type
Catalog Trim Dimensions—Inches (mm)
3
Size Code Inches (mm) Number Height Width Number Height Width
A 24.00 (609.6) RTA2024 24.00 (609.6) 20.00 (508.0) RTA2226 26.00 (660.4) 22.00 (558.8)
3 A 30.00 (762.0) RTA2030 30.00 (762.0) 20.00 (508.0) RTA2232 32.00 (812.8) 22.00 (558.8)
A 36.00 (914.4) RTA2036 36.00 (914.4) 20.00 (508.0) RTA2238 38.00 (965.2) 22.00 (558.8)
3 B 30.00 (762.0) RTB2030 30.00 (762.0) 20.00 (508.0) RTB2232 32.00 (812.8) 22.00 (558.8)
B 36.00 (914.4) RTB2036 36.00 (914.4) 20.00 (508.0) RTB2238 38.00 (965.2) 22.00 (558.8)
3 B 42.00 (1066.8) RTB2042 42.00 (1066.8) 20.00 (508.0) RTB2244 44.00 (1117.6) 22.00 (558.8)
C 36.00 (914.4) RTC2036 36.00 (914.4) 20.00 (508.0) RTC2238 38.00 (965.2) 22.00 (558.8)
3 C 42.00 (1066.8) RTC2042 42.00 (1066.8) 20.00 (508.0) RTC2244 44.00 (1117.6) 22.00 (558.8)
3
C 48.00 (1219.2) RTC2048 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) RTC2250 50.00 (1270.0) 22.00 (558.8)
D 30.00 (762.0) RTD2030 30.00 (762.0) 20.00 (508.0) RTD2232 32.00 (812.8) 22.00 (558.8)
3 D
D
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
RTD2036
RTD2042
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
RTD2238
RTD2244
38.00 (965.2)
44.00 (1117.6)
22.00 (558.8)
22.00 (558.8)
3 E 36.00 (914.4) RTE2036 36.00 (914.4) 20.00 (508.0) RTE2238 38.00 (965.2) 22.00 (558.8)
E 42.00 (1066.8) RTE2042 42.00 (1066.8) 20.00 (508.0) RTE2244 44.00 (1117.6) 22.00 (558.8)
3 E 48.00 (1219.2) RTE2048 48.00 (219.2) 20.00 (508.0) RTE2250 50.00 (1270.0) 22.00 (558.8)
3 Standard Trim Selection—14-Inch (355.6 mm) Wide Enclosure
3 Surface Type
Trim Dimensions—Inches (mm)
Flush Type
Trim Dimensions—Inches (mm)
Trim Door Enclosure Height— Catalog Catalog
3 Size Code
A
Inches (mm)
24.00 (609.6)
Number
RTA1424
Height
24.00 (609.6)
Width
14.00 (355.6)
Number
RTA1626
Height
26.00 (660.4)
Width
16.00 (406.4)
3 A 30.00 (762.0) RTA1430 30.00 (762.0) 14.00 (355.6) RTA1632 32.00 (812.8) 16.00 (406.4)
A 36.00 (914.4) RTA1436 36.00 (914.4) 14.00 (355.6) RTA1638 38.00 (965.2) 16.00 (406.4)
3 B 30.00 (762.0) RTB1430 30.00 (762.0) 14.00 (355.6) RTB1632 32.00 (812.8) 16.00 (406.4)
B 36.00 (914.4) RTB1436 36.00 (914.4) 14.00 (355.6) RTB1638 38.00 (965.2) 16.00 (406.4)
3 B 42.00 (1066.8) RTB1442 42.00 (1066.8) 14.00 (355.6) RTB1644 44.00 (1117.6) 16.00 (406.4)
C 36.00 (914.4) RTC1436 36.00 (914.4) 14.00 (355.6) RTC1638 38.00 (965.2) 16.00 (406.4)
3 C 42.00 (1066.8) RTC1442 42.00 (1066.8) 14.00 (355.6) RTC1644 44.00 (1117.6) 16.00 (406.4)
3 C
D
48.00 (1219.2)
30.00 (762.0)
RTC1448
RTD1430
48.00 (1219.2)
30.00 (762.0)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
RTC1650
RTD1632
50.00 (1270.0)
32.00 (812.8)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
3 D 36.00 (914.4) RTD1436 36.00 (914.4) 14.00 (355.6) RTD1638 38.00 (965.2) 16.00 (406.4)
D 42.00 (1066.8) RTD1442 42.00 (1066.8) 14.00 (355.6) RTD1644 44.00 (1117.6) 16.00 (406.4)
3 E 36.00 (914.4) RTE1436 36.00 (914.4) 14.00 (355.6) RTE1638 38.00 (965.2) 16.00 (406.4)
E 42.00 (1066.8) RTE1442 42.00 (1066.8) 14.00 (355.6) RTE1644 44.00 (1117.6) 16.00 (406.4)
3 E 48.00 (1219.2) RTE1448 48.00 (1219.2) 14.00 (355.6) RTE1650 50.00 (1270.0) 16.00 (406.4)

3.3
Custom Trim Selection
3
Instructions Outer Dimensions
In order to accommodate The outer dimensions are the 3
instances where the standard overall OUTSIDE dimensions
trims do not suit an of the trim. In surface- 3
installation, custom-sized mounted applications, this
trims may be ordered. Since
the trim mounts to the retrofit
is usually the same as the
outside dimensions of the
3
chassis, and not the existing
enclosure, custom trims
enclosure to be renovated. For
flush-mounted applications, 3
can solve many problems an additional amount of trim
encountered with differing material extends beyond the 3
enclosure sizes and outer edge of the box, in order
configurations. Contact to cover any gap between 3
your local satellite plant to the wall material and the
ensure manufacturability and
determine lead time required.
box. Extending the outer
dimensions can cover larger
3
than normal wall gaps or
imperfections that may be 3
encountered.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Application Guidelines
3
Instructions
3 ● In order to meet minimum (i.e., main breaker or main assume that the chassis is trim. Contact your local
wire bending space lugs, amperes, interrupting mounted in the center of the Satellite for pricing and
3 requirements and to rating, circuit space, branch existing box, both vertically ordering details
ensure ease of installation, breakers, accessories) and horizontally. Where site ● The table below provides a
3 minimum enclosure space
dimensions have been
● Using the electrical conditions require the
chassis to be offset from
“Trim Door Size Code.”
requirement data, select Using this code, select a
3 defined for each chassis.
In order to ensure a proper
a base chassis and any
required breakers, options
this centrally mounted
position, it is the installer’s
standard trim from the
tables that will fit the
fit, every panelboard to be responsibility to ensure wire
3
and accessories outside dimensions of the
renovated must be carefully ● This page provides the bending space and electrical existing box. Refer to Page
surveyed prior to installation minimum dimensions of clearance requirements are V2-T3-55 to define non-
3 ● Determine the electrical the enclosure, in which met. Installing chassis offset standard trim requirements
requirements of the each base chassis may be from the central position
3 panelboard to be renovated installed. These dimensions requires a custom offset
3
Minimum Enclosure Sizing
3 Ampere Number of Main Device Trim Door Minimum Enclosure Dimensions—Inches (mm)
Rating Circuits Type Size Code Height Width Depth
3 Main Lug Only
3 100 18
30
MLO
MLO
A
B
19.50 (495.3)
26.50 (673.1)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
3 42 MLO C 33.50 (850.9) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)

225 18 MLO A 19.50 (495.3) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)
3 30 MLO B 26.50 (673.1) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)
42 MLO C 33.50 (850.9) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)
3 Main Breaker
3 100 18
30
BAB, GHB
BAB, GHB
A
B
19.50 (495.3)
26.50 (673.1)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
3 42 BAB, GHB C 33.50 (850.9) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)

18 EHD B 30.00 (762.0) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)
3 30 EHD D 36.00 (914.4) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)
3
42 EHD E 42.00 (1066.8) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)
18 QBHW A 19.50 (195.3) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)
3 30 QBHW B 26.50 (673.1) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)

42 QBHW C 33.50 (850.9) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)
3 18 ED, FD B 30.00 (762.0) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)
30 ED, FD D 36.00 (914.4) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)
3 42 ED, FD E 42.00 (1066.8) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)
3 18
30
EDH, HFD, FDC
EDH, HFD, FDC
B
D
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
3 42 EDH, HFD, FDC E 42.00 (1066.8) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)

225 18 ED, FD B 30.00 (762.0) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)
3 30 ED, FD D 36.00 (914.4) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)
42 ED, FD E 42.00 (1066.8) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)
3 18 EDH, HFD, FDC B 30.00 (762.0) 14.00 (355.6) 4.50 (114.3)
3 30
42
EDH, HFD, FDC
EDH, HFD, FDC
D
E
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
3
3
3
3.3
Options and Accessories
3
Branch Circuit Breakers—P1R Insulated/Isolated Ground Bus (Separately Mounted)
Ampere Interrupting Rating Breaker Aluminum Copper
3
Rating (kA Sym.) 240 Vac 1 Type
15–60 10 BAB
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number 3
70 10 BAB P1RGKA P1RNKC
3
80–100 10 BAB
15–30 10 BABRP 3
Neutral Kit (Separately Mounted) l
3
15–30 10 BABRSP 3
15–50 2 10 QBGF 4
Number of
Termination
Aluminum
Catalog
Copper
Catalog
3
3
15–50 2 10 QBGFEP 5 Points Number Number
15–20 10 QBCAF 6 18 P1RNKA18 P1RNKC18
15–60 10 BAB-D 7 30 P1RNKA30 P1RNKC30 3
15–30 10 BAB-C 9 42 P1RNKA42 P1RNKC42
15–60 22 QBHW 3
70 22 QBHW
80–100 22 QBHW
Depth Adder Kits m 3
Standard Pow-R-Line 1R—Fits 4.50 to 6.00 inches
15–30 22 QBHGF Standard Pow-R-Line 2R—Fits 4.75 to 6.00 inches 3
15–30 22 QBHGFEP
3
For Use With Box Depth—
15–20 22 QBHCAF 6 Accessory/Kits Inches (mm) Part Number
Provision — —
3
1.50 depth adder 6.00–7.50 (152.4–190.5) P1RDA15
3.00 depth adder 7.50–9.00 (190.5–228.6) P1RDA30
Branch Breakers—P2R 4.50 depth adder 9.00–10.50 (228.6–266.7) P1RDA45

3
6.00 depth adder 10.50–12.00 (266.7–304.8) P1RDA60
Ampere Interrupting Rating Breaker Type
Rating (kA Sym.) 480Y/277 Vac Rating (kA Sym.) 3
15–20 14 GHQ
15–20 14 GHB
Box Collar Kits n 3
For Use With Box Depth—
25–60
70–100
14
14
GHB
GHB
Accessory/Kits Inches (mm) Part Number 3
Box collar 3.50–4.50 (88.9–114.3) P1RBC10
15–60 14 GHBGFEP 9
Notes
3
15–20 14 GHB-HID j
3
1 Single-pole breakers are rated 120 Vac maximum.
15–30 25 HGHB 2 50A devices available as two-pole only.

3 Remote controllable circuit breaker.
3
Provision — —
4 GFCI for 5 mA personnel protection.
3
Copper Main Bus Adder 7 HID (High Intensity Discharge) rated breaker.
8 Switching neutral breaker. Single-pole device requires two pole spaces; two-pole device
Main Bus
Ampere Rating
Catalog
Number requires three pole spaces.
9 GFP for 30 mA equipment protection. Requires two-pole spaces. 277 Vac only.
3
3
100 k j HID (High Intensity Discharge) rated breaker.
k k To convert base chassis catalog number from aluminum main bus to copper main bus, change
225
the 6th digit of the aluminum base chassis catalog number to “C” (e.g., P1RL1A1-42 becomes
P1RL1C1-42).
l Each base chassis includes a neutral bar that contains one connection point for every circuit
3
Copper Terminal Ground Bar for Copper Cable Only space available. Use this kit when additional connection points are required or the neutral
must be separately mounted to meet existing cable locations. 3
Catalog m Allows for panel to be used in boxes deeper than 6.00 inches.
Number n Allows for panel to be used in boxes less than 4.50 inches.
3
P1RGBC
3
3
3
3
Contents
3 Type PRL3a
Description Page
3 Type PRL1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-26
Type PRL1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-30
3 Type PRL1a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-34
Type PRL2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-38
3 Type PRL2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-42
Type PRL2a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-46
3 Type PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-58
V2-T3-59
3 Box Sizing and Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type PRL3E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-61
V2-T3-62
3 Type PRL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-66
Type PRL4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-76
3 Type PRL5P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-86
3
3
3 Type PRL3a
● 600 Vac maximum
● Lighting panelboard or
● UL 67, UL 50
3 ●
(250 Vdc)
power distribution
panelboard
W-P-115c
3
three-phase three-wire, ● Fully rated or series rated ● Refer to Page V2-T3-7 for
single-phase three-wire, ● Interrupting ratings up to additional information
single-phase two-wire 200 kA symmetrical
3 ● 800A maximum main lugs ● Suitable for use as Service
● 600A maximum main Entrance Equipment, when
3 breaker specified on the order
● 225A maximum branch ● See Pages V2-T3-7
3 breakers through V2-T3-23 for
● Bolt-on branch breakers additional information
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Product Selection
3
PRL3a
Type PRL3a
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical)
3
Ampere Breaker
Rating 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc Type
3
Main Lug Only
100 — — — — — 3
250 — — — — —
400 — — — — — 3
3
600 — — — — —
800 1 — — — — —
Main Breaker
3
100 18 14 — 10 EHD
100 18 14 14 10 FDB 3
100 22 — — — EDB
100 42 — — — EDS 3
100 65 — — — ED
100 100 — — — EDH 3
100 65 35 18 10 FD, FDE
100 100 65 25 22 HFD, HFDE 3
100 200 100 35 22 FDC
100 200 150 — — FCL 3
100 200 200 200 100 2 FB-P 3
225 22 — — — EDB 3
3
225 42 — — — EDS
225 65 — — — ED
225
225
100
200
—
—
—
—
—
—
EDH
EDC
3
225
225
65
100
35
65
18
25
10
22
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
3
225
250
200
65
100
35
35
18
22
10
FDC
JD
3
250 100 65 25 22 HJD
3
250 200 100 35 22 JDC
400 65 — — 10 DK 3
400 65 35 25 10 KD
400 100 65 35 22 HKD 3
400 100 65 — — LHH
400 200 100 65 22 KDC 3
400 65 — — — LCL 4
400 200 200 200 100 2 LA-P 34 3
600 65 35 18 22 LGE
600 100 65 35 22 LGH 3
600 200 100 50 42 LGC
600 65 35 25 22 LD 3
3
600 100 65 35 25 HLD
600 200 100 50 25 LDC
600
600
65
100
35
65
25
35
22
25
CLD 5
CHLD 5
3
600 200 100 50 25 CLDC 5
3
Notes
1 800A MLO requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide box.
2 100,000 based on NEMA test procedure.
3
3
3 Top feed only.
4 Requires 6.50-inch (165.1 mm) deep box. Not available in Type 3R, 12, 4 and 4X enclosures.
5 100% rated circuit breaker. Requires copper bus. Not available in Type 12, 4 and 4X enclosures.
3
PRL3a Branch Circuit Breakers PRL3a Branch Circuit Breakers, continued

3 Ampere Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) Breaker Ampere Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) Breaker
3 Rating
15–60
240 Vac
10 23
480 Vac
—
600 Vac
—
250 Vdc
—
Type
BAB
Rating
25–60
240 Vac
65
480 Vac
14 89
600 Vac
—
250 Vdc
14
Type
GHB
3 15–60 10 — — — BAB-H 70–100 65 14 89 — 14 GHB

70 10 23 — — — BAB 15–30 65 25 89 — — HGHB
3 70 10 — — — BAB-H 15–20 65 14 89 — 14 GHQRSP 7
10 23 14 89 GHBS 7
3
80–100 — — — BAB 15–30 65 — 14
80–100 10 — — — BAB-H 15–60 — 14 89 — — GHBGFEP
3 15–50 1 10 23 — — — QBGF 15–20 — 14 89 — — GHBHID 5

15–50 1 10 — — — QBGFEP 15–60 18 j 14 8 — 10 EHD
3 15–20 10 23 — — — QBCAF 4 70–100 18 j 14 8 — 10 EHD
15–60 10 23 — — — BAB-D 5 15–60 18 V14 14 10 FDB
3 15–30 10 23 — — — BAB-C 6 70–100 18 14 14 10 FDB
3 15–30
15–30
10 2
10 2
—
—
—
—
—
—
BABRP 7
BABRSP 7
110–150
15–60
18
65 j
14
35 8
14
18
10
10
FDB
FD, FDE
3 15–60 22 23 — — — QBHW 70–100 65 j 35 8 18 10 FD, FDE

15–60 22 — — — QBHW-H 110–225 65 j 35 18 10 FD k, FDE
3 70 22 23 — — — QBHW 15–60 100 j 65 8 25 22 HFD, HFDE
70 22 — — — QBHW-H 70–100 100 j 65 8 25 22 HFD, HFDE
3 80–100 22 23 — — — QBHW 110–225 100 j 65 25 22 HFD k, HFDE
3 80–100
15–30
22
22
—
—
—
—
—
—
QBHW-H
QBHGF
15–60
70–100
200
200
100
100
35
35
22
22
FDC
FDC
3 15–30 22 — — — QBHGFEP 110–225 200 100 35 22 FDC k

15–20 22 23 — — — QBHCAF 4 100–225 22 — — — EDB k
3 15–20 65 14 89 — — GHQ 100–225 42 — — — EDS k
14 89 ED k
3
15–20 65 — 14 GHB 100–225 65 — — —
100–225 100 — — — EDH k
3 100–225 200 — — — EDC k
Notes
3 1 50A devices are available as two-pole only.
2 Single-pole breaker rated 120 Vac.
3 3 Two-pole breaker rated 120/240 Vac.

5 HID (High Intensity Discharge) rated breaker.
3 6 Switching Neutral Breaker. single-pole device requires two-pole space, two-pole device
requires three-pole space.

3 7 Solenoid operated breaker.
8 Single-pole breaker rated 277 Vac.
3
9 For use on 480Y/277V systems only.
j AIC rating for two- and three-pole breakers only.
k Maximum of six breakers per panel, 175–225A.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Panel Layout Instructions Layout Example 3
1. Select: 1. Description of Panel
a. Required mains (lugs or breaker). Type PRL3a three-phase, four-wire, 120/208 Vac flush 3
mounting. Panel to have short-circuit rating of 22,000
b. Neutral where required.
c. Branch circuits as required.
symmetrical amperes. Main breaker 400A, three-pole, 3
bottom mounting. Branch circuits bolt-on as follows:
2. Layout panel as shown below, using appropriate 12–200A single-pole QBHW
1–200A three-pole ED
3
“X” dimensions.
3. Using total X units (panel height) find box height in inches
1–225A three-pole ED
3
(mm) and box catalog number from table below. (When total 2. Layout Information from Layout—PRL3a table (left):
X units come out to an uneven number, use next highest a. 400A Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . = 8X 3
number; i.e., if total X comes out 25X, use 31X.)
Layout—PRL3a
b.
c.
12-poles of QBHW . . . . . . . = 5X
Two three-pole ED breakers . .= 6X
3
Poles d. Main breaker, 400A,
Three-pole DK . . . . . . . . . . = 15X
3
6 - 3X BAB, QBHW, QBCAF,
12 - 5X
18 - 8X
BABRP, BABRSP, QBHCAF
GHQ, GHB, HGHB
Total Height . . . . . . . . . . . . = 34X
3
3. From Box Tabulation—PRL3a table (below):
3
24 - 10X 1
30 - 13X a. 34X Height (use 40X box)
3
36 - 15X b. Box Height 72 inches (1828.8 mm)
42 - 18X
c. Box Catalog Number . . . . . . . . YS2072 or EZB2072R
EDB, EDS, ED,
1-Pole
2-Pole
1-Pole
2-Pole
1X EDH, EDC,
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE, Box Tabulation—PRL3a
3
3
2X HFD, FDC, HFDE
1-Pole YS Box LT Trim EZ Box EZ Trim
150A max. per branch breaker
2-Pole 3-pole “X” Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
3X (300A max. per connector)
3
Units Box Height Number Number Number Number
2X EDB, EDS, ED, 100–400A
2-Pole EDH, EDC
2- or 3-pole
3X FD, HFD, FDC,
2 FDE, HFDE
14X 36.00 (914.4) YS2036 LT2036S or F EZB2036R EZT2036S or F
3
three-pole 23X 48.00 (1219.2) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F
Neutral
Section
5X 100–250A 31X 60.00 (1524.0) YS2060 LT2060S or F EZB2060R EZT2060S or F 3
8X 400–800A 40X 72.00 (1524.0) YS2072 LT2072S or F EZB2072R EZT2072S or F
11X 800A with through-feed lug 53X 90.00 (2286.0) YS2090 LT2090S or F EZB2090R EZT2090S or F 3
Main Lug 2X 100A 600A
Section 5X 250A 23X 48.00 (1219.2) YS2048 LTV2048S or F EZB2048R EZTV2048S or F 3
8X 400–600A
31X 60.00 (1524.0) YS2060 LTV2060S or F EZB2060R EZTV2060S or F
Main Horizontal
14X
2X
800A
EHD, FDB, FD,
40X 72.00 (1524.0) YS2072 LTV2072S or F EZB2072R EZTV2072S or F 3
53X 90.00 (2286.0) YS2090 LTV2090S or F EZB2090R EZTV2090S or F
Breaker
Section
Mounting 2-Pole
3X
HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE
EDB, EDS, ED, 800A 3
three-pole EDH, EDC 3
3
23X 48.00 (1219.2) YS2848 LTV2848S or F — —
Vertical 7X EHD, FDB, FD, FDE, HFD, FDC,
31X 60.00 (1524.0) YS2860 LTV2860S or F — —
Mounting HFDE, EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC 4
9X FCL, FB-P 5 40X
53X
72.00 (1524.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
YS2872
YS2890
LTV2872S or F
LTV2890S or F
—
—
—
—
3
14X JD, HJD, JDC
15X DK, KD, HKD, KDC, LHH
Cabinets Standard Depth 3
17X LD, HLD, LDC, CLD, CHLD, CLDC
Fronts are code-gauge steel, 5-3/4 inches (146.1 mm).
18X
21X
LGE, LGH, LGC
LCL, LA-P 56
ANSI-61 light gray painted 3
finish. Top and Bottom Gutters
Notes
5-1/2 inches (139.7 mm) 3
1 GHB, HGHB and GHQ breakers cannot be mixed on same connector as BAB, QBHW, BABRP
minimum.
galvanized steel without
and BABRSP.
2 Maximum of six breakers per panel. knockouts. Standard depth is
Side Gutters
3
3 Horizontal mounted 15–150A main breakers EHD, FDB, FD, FDE, HFD, HFDE and FDC, will be 5-3/4 inches (146.1 mm).
furnished as branch breaker construction. Branch breakers single-, two- or three-pole as
Standard widths are:
4 inches (101.6 mm)
minimum.
3
required, may be located opposite these main breakers.
4 If optional terminal kit 3TA225FDK is required, use 10X.
5 FB-P and LA-P top mounting only.
20-inch (508.0 mm)
100–600A. 3
6 LCL or LA-P main breaker requires 6-1/2-inch (165.1 mm) deep box. 28-inch (711.2 mm)
800A. 3
Contents
3 Type PRL3E
Description Page
3 Type PRL1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-26
Type PRL1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-30
3 Type PRL1a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-34
Type PRL2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-38
3 Type PRL2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-42
Type PRL2a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-46
3 Type PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type PRL3E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-58
V2-T3-62
3 Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Box Sizing and Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-63
V2-T3-64
3 Type PRL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-66
Type PRL4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-76
3 Type PRL5P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-86
3
3
3 Type PRL3E
● 480V Vac maximum
● Lighting and appliance
● UL 67, UL 50
3 ●
(250 Vdc)
branch panelboard
W-P-115c
3
3 Suitable for use as Service
●
● 600A main lugs Entrance Equipment, when
● 600A main breaker specified on the order
3 ● 125A maximum branch ● See Pages V2-T3-7
breakers through V2-T3-23 for
3 ● Bolt-on branch breakers additional information
Factory assembled
3
●

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Product Selection
3
PRL3E
Type PRL3E
3
Ampere Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical)
Rating Breaker Type 240 Vac 480 Vac 250 Vdc 3
Main Lug Only
100 — — — — 3
3
250 — — — —
400 — — — —
600 — — — —
3
Main Breaker
125 EGB 35 18 10 3
125 EGS 100 35 35
125 EGH 200 65 42 3
225
225
EDB
EDS
22
42
—
—
—
—
3
225 ED 65 — — 3
225 EDH 100 — —
225 EDC 200 — — 3
225 FD, FDE 65 35 10
225 HFD, HFDE 100 65 22
3
225
400
FDC
DK
200
65
100
—
22
—
3
400 KD 65 35 10 3
400 HKD 100 65 22
400 LHH 100 65 — 3
3
400 KDC 200 100 22
600 LGE 65 35 22
600 LGH 100 65 22
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

3 Assembled Circuit Breaker Panelboards and Lighting Controls

Box size and box and trim catalog numbers for all standard panelboard
3 types are found on Page V2-T3-65.
Instructions Cabinets
3 1. Using description of the 4. Select panelboard type Fronts are code-gauge
required panelboard, from first column, steel, ANSI-61 light gray
3 select the rating and main breaker frame, if painted finish.
type of main required. applicable, from second
column, and sub-feed
breaker frame, if
galvanized steel without
of branch circuit poles, knockouts. Standard depth
3 including provisions,
third column. is 5-3/4 inches (146.1 mm).
required in the Standard width is 20 inches
3 panelboard. Do not 5. From Step #2, determine
count main breaker 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide
3 poles. Convert two-
or three-pole branch
circuits in Column 4. box is available.
3 breaker to single-poles,
i.e., three-pole breaker,
trim catalog numbers
5-1/2 inches (139.7 mm)
3 Determine sub-feed
minimum.
breaker or through-feed the order.

3 lug requirements.
3 rating section from
Page V2-T3-65.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
3
PRL3E Panelboard Sizing
3
Panelboard
Types
(H) = Horizontal
(V) = Vertical
(H) = Horizontal
(V) = Vertical
Including
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
3
125A 3
Main breaker EG, EGS, EGH — 12 36.00 (914.4) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2036 LT2036S or F EZB2036R EZT2036S or F
(H)
3
Main lugs or
main breaker
FD, HFD
(V)
3
Main lugs or main FD EHD 18 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F
breaker with 125A
through-feed lugs or
HFD
(V)
FD
HFD 30 60.00 (1524.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2060 LT2060S or F EZB2060R EZT2060S or F 3
sub-feed breaker TFL
(V)
3
250A
Main lugs or EDS, ED, — 18 36.00 (914.4) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2036 LT2036S or F EZB2036R EZT2036S or F 3
(V) —
—
30
42
42.00 (1066.8) 20.00 (508.0)
48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1) YS2042
5.75 (146.1) YS2048
LT2042S or F
LT2048S or F
EZB2042R
EZB2048R
EZT2042S or F
EZT2048S or F
3
Main lugs or main
breaker with 225A
FD, HFD,
EDS, ED,
FD, HFD,
EDS, ED,
through-feed lugs or EDH (V) EDH (V) 30 60.00 (1524.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2060 LT2060S or F EZB2060R EZT2060S or F
sub-feed breaker 42 60.00 (1524.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2060 LT2060S or F EZB2060R EZT2060S or F 3
400A
Main breaker DK, KD, HKD, — 18 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2048 LT2048S or F EZB2048R EZT2048S or F
3
KDC
3
Main breaker with 225A DK, KD, HKD,
through-feed lugs or KDC
EHD, FD, HFD,
EDB, EDS, ED,
3
sub-feed breaker (V) EDH (V)
3
Main lugs or main DK, KD, HKD, JD, HJD, JDC, 18 72.00 (1828.8) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2072 LT2072S or F EZB2072R EZT2072S or F
breaker with 400A KDC DK, KD,
through-feed lugs or (V) HKD, KDC 30 72.00 (1828.8) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2072 LT2072S or F EZB2072R EZT2072S or F
sub-feed breaker (V) 42 90.00 (2286.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) YS2090 LT2090S or F EZB2090R EZT2090S or F
3
PRL3E Branch Circuit Breakers

3
Ampere Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) Breaker 3
Rating 240 Vac 480 Vac 250 Vdc Type
15–125 25 18 10 EGB 3
15–125 85 35 35 EGS
15–125 100 65 42 EGH
3
Note
3
3
3
3
3
3
Contents
3 Type PRL4
Description Page
3 Type PRL1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-26
Type PRL1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-30
3 Type PRL1a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-34
Type PRL2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-38
3 Type PRL2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-42
Type PRL2a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-46
3 Type PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type PRL3E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-58
V2-T3-62
3 Type PRL4
Type PRL4B Circuit Breaker and Type PRL4F Fusible Panelboards
3 Box Sizing and Selection—PRL4B . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-70
Box Sizing and Selection—PRL4F . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-73
3 Type PRL4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-76
Type PRL5P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-86
3
3
3 Type PRL4
● 600 Vac maximum
● Power distribution
● UL 67, UL 50
3 ●
(600 Vdc)
Three-phase, four-wire, ●
panelboard
●
●
Federal Specification
W-P-115c
3
3 Suitable for use as Service
●
● PRL4B circuit breaker Entrance Equipment, when
panelboard specified on the order
3 ● PRL4F fusible switch ● See Pages V2-T3-7
panelboard through V2-T3-23 for
3 ● 1200A maximum mains additional information
3 devices
● Bolt-on branch devices
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Product Selection
3
PRL4 Main Lugs and Main Breakers PRL4 Main Fusible Switches
Type PRL4
Interrupting Rating Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical)
3
Ampere
Ampere (kA Symmetrical) Breaker
Rating 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc 600 Vdc Type
Rating 240 Vac
Main Fusible Switch 240 Vac, 250 Vdc 678
480 Vac Device Type
3
3
Main Lug Only
200 See Page V2-T3-69 FDPB
250 — — — — — —
400 FDPW
3
400 — — — — — —
600 9 FDPW
600 — — — — — —
800 9 FDPW
3
800 — — — — — —
1200 — — — — — — 1200 9 FDPW
3
Main Breaker 1 Main Fusible Switch 600 Vac 67
250 65 35 18 10 — JD 200 See Page V2-T3-69 FDPB
3
250 100 65 25 22 — HJD 400 FDPW
250 — — — 42 35 HJDDC 2
600 9 FDPW
3
250 200 100 35 22 — JDC
800 9 FDPW
250 200 200 — — — LCL
400 65 — — 10 — DK 1200 9 FDPW
400 65 35 25 10 — KD Notes
3
400 65 35 25 — — CKD 34
3
1 For ground fault protection on main devices, see Modification 14—Applies to 310 and
400 100 65 35 22 — HKD 310+ Trip Units on Page V2-T3-102 or Modification 15 on Page V2-T3-102.
2 For use on DC systems only.
400 — — — 42 35 HKDDC 2
400 100 65 35 42 — LHH
3 100% rated breaker. Requires copper bus. Not available in Type 12, 4 and 4X enclosures.
4 Breaker only available in three-pole frame.
3
400 100 65 35 — — CHKD 34
3
5 Requires 44-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box.
400 200 100 65 22 — KDC 6 For ground fault protection on main devices, see Modification 15 on Page V2-T3-102.
400 200 200 — — — LCL 7 Fuses not included. Specify required fuse clips on all switches.
400 200 200 200 — — LA-P 8 Class J Fuse provisions are applicable only to 600V units. When required, use dimensions of
600V units for all voltages 600 and below.

3
600 65 35 18 22 — LGE 1
3
9 No DC rating on 600, 800 and 1200A switches
600 100 65 35 22 — LGH 1
600 200 100 50 42 — LGC
600 200 150 65 50 — LGU 3
600 65 35 25 22 — LD
600 65 35 25 — — CLD 3 3
600 100 65 35 25 — HLD
600 — — — 42 35 HLDDC 2 3
600 100 65 35 — — CHLD 3
600 200 100 50 25 — LDC
3
600 200 100 50 — — CLDC 3
800
800
65
100
50
65
25
35
22
25
—
—
MDL
HMDL
3
800
800
—
65
—
50
—
25
42
—
35
—
HMDLDC 2
CMDL 3
3
800
800
100
200
65
200
35
200
—
—
—
—
CHMDL 3
NB-P
3
800
800
65
100
50
65
25
35
—
—
—
—
ND
HND
3
800
800
200
65
100
50
65
25
—
—
—
—
NDC
CND 35
3
3
800 100 65 35 — — CHND 35
800 200 100 65 — — CNDC 35
3
1200 65 50 25 — — ND
1200 100 65 35 — — HND
1200 200 100 65 — — NDC
1200 65 50 25 — — CND 35 3
1200 100 65 35 — — CHND 35
1200 200 100 65 — — CNDC 35 3
1200 — — — 42 50 NBDC 2
3
3
PRL4 Branch Devices PRL4 Branch Devices, continued

3 Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical)
Ampere Breaker Ampere Breaker
3 Rating
15–60
240 Vac
10 23
480 Vac
—
600 Vac
—
250 Vdc
—
600 Vdc
—
Type
BAB
Rating
250
240 Vac
100
480 Vac
65
600 Vac
25
250 Vdc
22
600 Vdc
—
Type
HJD
3 15–60
70–100
10
10 23
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BAB-H
BAB
70–250
70–225
—
200
—
100
—
35
42
22
35
—
HJDDC 6
JDC
3 70–100
15–50 1
10
10 23
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BAB-H
QBGF
250
125–250
200
200
100
200
35
—
22
—
—
—
JDC
LCL
3 15–20
15–60
10 23
22 23
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
QBCAF 4
QBHW
250–400
100–400
65
65
—
35
—
25
10
10
—
—
DK
KD
3
15–60 22 — — — — QBHW-H 100–400 65 35 25 — — CKD 9jk
70–100 22 23 — — — — QBHW 100–400 100 65 35 22 — HKD
3
70–100 22 — — — — QBHW-H 100–400 — — — 42 35 HKDDC 6
15–30 22 23 — — — — QBHGF 100–400 100 65 35 — — CHKD 9jk
22 23 QBHCAF 4
3
15–20 — — — — 125–400 100 65 35 42 — LHH
15–20 65 2 14 5 — — — GHQ 7 100–400 200 100 65 22 — KDC
15–60 65 2 14 5 — 14 — GHB 7 200–400 200 200 — — — LCL
3 70–100 65 2 14 5 — 14 — GHB 7 250–600 65 35 18 22 — LGE
15–30 65 2 25 5 — — — HGHB 7 300–600 65 35 25 22 — LD
3 15–60 18 8 14 5 — 10 — EHD 300–600 65 35 25 — — CLD 9
70–100 18 8 14 5 — 10 — EHD 250–600 100 65 35 22 — LGH
3 15–60 18 14 14 10 — FDB 300–600 100 65 35 25 — HLD
70–100 18 14 14 10 — FDB 300–600 — — — 42 35 HLDDC 6
3 110–150 18 14 14 10 — FDB 300–600 100 65 35 — — CHLD 1
15–60 65 8 35 5 18 10 — FD, FDE 250–600 200 100 35 42 — LGC
3 70–100 65 8 35 5 18 10 — FD, FDE 300–600 200 100 50 25 — LDC
110–225 65 8 35 18 10 — FD, FDE 300–600 200 100 50 25 — CLDC 1
3 15–60 100 8 65 5 25 22 — HFD, HFDE 250–600 200 150 65 50 — LGU
70–100 100 8 65 5 25 22 — HFD, HFDE 400–800 65 50 25 22 — MDL
3 110–225 100 8 65 25 22 — HFD, HFDE 400–800 100 65 35 25 — HMDL
15–60 200 100 35 22 — FDC 300–800 — — — 42 35 HMDLDC 6
3 70–100 200 100 35 22 — FDC 400–800 65 50 25 — — CMDL 1
110–225 200 100 35 22 — FDC 400–800 100 65 35 — — CHMDL 1
3 15–100 200 150 — — — FCL 400–800 65 50 25 — — ND
15–150 — — — 42 35 HFDDC 6 400–800 100 65 35 — — HND
3 100–225
100–225
22
42
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
EDB
EDS
400–800
400–800
200
65
100
50
65
25
—
—
—
—
NDC
CND 12
3 100–225
100–225
65
100
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ED
EDH
400–800
400–800
100
200
65
100
35
65
—
—
—
—
CHND 12
CNDC 12
3 100–225
70–225
200
65
—
35
—
18
—
10
—
—
EDC
JD
600–1200
600–1200
65
100
50
65
25
35
—
—
—
—
ND
HND
3 250
70–225
65
100
35
65
18
25
10
22
—
—
JD
HJD
600–1200
600–1200
200
65
100
50
65
25
—
—
—
—
NDC
CND 12
3 600–1200
600–1200
100
200
65
100
35
65
—
—
—
—
CHND 12
CNDC 12
3 700–1200 — — — 42 50 NBDC 6
Notes
3 1 50A devices are available as two-pole only.
2 Single-pole breakers rated 120 Vac.
3
3 Two-pole breakers rated 120/240 Vac.
5 Single-pole breakers rated 277 Vac.
3 6 For use on DC systems only.

7 At 480V, must be used on 480Y/277V grounded wye systems only.
3
8 AIC rating for two- and three-pole breakers only.
9 100% rated breaker. Requires copper bus. Not available in Type 12, 4 and 4X enclosures.
j Breaker only available in three-pole frame.
3 k Available in single branch mounting only.
3
3
3.3
PRL4 Branch Devices, continued FDPW and FDPB Switch Ratings, 240 or 600 Vac
Ampere Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) Breaker Fuse Short-Circuit
3
Ampere Class Ratings
Rating 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac
Integrally Fused, Current Limiting Circuit Breaker
250 Vdc Type
Rating Used (kA Symmetrical) 3
30–100 R, J 5 200
15–100 200 200 200 1 FB-P
200 Single R, J 5 200 3
125–225 200 200 200 1 LA-P
3
200 Twin R 6, J 5, T 200
250–400 200 200 200 1 LA-P
400, 600 7 R 7, J 5, T 200
1
3
400–600 200 200 200 NB-P
800, 1200 7 L 200
700–800 200 200 200 1 NB-P
Notes
Fusible Switches 240 Vac, 250 Vdc 2
1 100 kAIC based on NEMA test procedure. 3
30/30 3 See table at the right FDPW-Twin 2 Fuses not included. Specify required fuse clips on all switches. (T fuse clips not
60/60 3 FDPW-Twin available for 200/200 twin switches.)

3 When branches of a twin unit are of different ampere ratings, as a 30–60 twin unit, price
3
100/100 3 FDPW-Twin
3
and layout as a 60–60 twin unit; when a 60–100 twin unit, price and layout as a 100–100
200/200 FDPB-Twin twin unit.
4 No DC rating on 600, 800 and 1200A switches.
3
100 FDPW-Single 5 Class J fuse provisions are applicable to 600V units. When required, use price and
200 FDPB-Single dimensions of 600V units for all voltages 600V and below.
6 Twin 200A switches are not available with Class R fuse clips at 600V.
400 See table at the right FDPW-Single 7 When shunt trip is required, 400–600A switches used with Class R fuses are rated 100 kAIC. 3
600 4 FDPW-Single
800 4 FDPW-Single 3
1200 4 FDPW-Single
Fusible Switches 600 Vac 2 3
30/30 3
60/60 3
See table at the right FDPW-Twin
FDPW-Twin
3
100/100 3 FDPW-Twin 3
200/200 5 FDPB-Twin
100 FDPW-Single 3
200 FDPB-Single
400 See table at the right FDPW-Single
3
600 4 FDPW-Single
3
800 4 FDPW-Single
1200 4 FDPW-Single 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Box Sizing and Selection—PRL4B

3 Main Lug Only (MLO), Main Breaker, Neutral, Through-Feed Lug * = Space available for branch devices. For device sizing,
(TFL) and Sub-Feed Lug (SFL) “X” Space Requirements. (For see Page V2-T3-72.
3 other configurations not shown, refer to Eaton.)
• = Blank means no bus under cover, to meet NEC cable
bending space.
3
3 PRL4B Layout
Standard Main Lug, Through-Feed and Sub-Feed Lugs a Main Breaker with Neutral (when required)
3 (500 kcmil Maximum) (500 kcmil Maximum)
MLO, SFL MLO, TFL
3 10X
N
10X
N
7X
N Main Breaker
19X
N
3 250A a, 400A a, 250A, 400A, Main Breaker

600A a, 800A
3 *
*
600A, 800A
*
*
*
3 7X Through-
Feed Lugs
3 3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W 3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W 3Ph 4W,

3Ph 3W
3 800A Vertically Mtd. MDL Main Breaker only in 24-inch (609.6 mm) wide box.
Available with 38X and 50X Panel Height only.
MLO MLO, TFL
3 N N N
2X Blank
12X 12X 7X
3 Main Breaker
1200A 1200A Main Breaker
3 36-inch
(914.4 mm) * *
36-inch
(914.4 mm) *
Minimum Minimum *
3 Width 2X Blank 7X Through-
Feed Lugs
Width 2X Blank
2X Blank
3 3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W 3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W
3 Optional Main Lugs, Through-Feed and Sub-Feed Lugs a (750 kcmil Maximum)
MLO, SFL MLO, TFL
3
N N
20X 20X 13X 13X
3
250A a, 400A a, 250A, 400A,
3 600A a, 800A
*
600A, 800A
*
* *
3 3X Blank 9X Through-
Feed Lugs 3X Blank 9X Through-
Feed Lugs
3 3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W
3 MLO MLO, TFL
3 20X
N
20X
N
15X 15X
3 1200A
36-inch
120A
36-inch
(914.4 mm) * * (914.4 mm) * *
3 Minimum
Width Blank Through-
Minimum
5X 11X Feed Lugs 5X 11X Feed Lugs
3
3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W
3
Note
3 1 Sub-feed lugs are available 250–600A. For 600A, use 1200A “A” space.

3.3
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Box Dimensions—PRL4B
“X” Catalog
3
Panel Layout and Dimensions Layout Example Units Number Height Width Depth 1
To determine the dimensions ● 1–PRL4B panelboard,
26X BX2457 57.00 (1447.8) 24.00 (609.6) 11.31 (287.0)
3
of a given panelboard 480Y/277 volt, three-phase
enclosure, make a layout
sketch by fitting together
four-wire 65 kA, 800A,
main lug, consisting of:
38X BX2473 73.50 (1866.9) 24.00 (609.6) 11.31 (287.0)
3
50X BX2490 90.00 (2286.0) 24.00 (609.6) 11.31 (287.0)
the main, branch and lug
modules according to the
● 12–20A/single-pole HFD 38X BX3673 73.50 (1866.9) 36.00 (914.4) 11.31 (287.0) 3
● 2–250A/three-pole HJD 50X BX3690 90.00 (2286.0) 36.00 (914.4) 11.31 (287.0)
appropriate tables in the
layout guide. Assign “X”
● 1–400A/three-pole HKD 38X BX4473 73.50 (1866.9) 44.00 (1117.6) 11.31 (287.0) 3
units to each module as
3
Reference PRL4B Layout 50X BX4490 90.00 (2286.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 11.31 (287.0)
shown and obtain a total
Example
“X” number. Top and Bottom Gutters
The height of the enclosure is
1. From layout guide, total
“X” height of panel = 10.63-inch (269.9 mm) minimum. 3
related to the total “X” units 26X, (which is a design
in the layout as shown in standard and no rounding Side Gutters—Minimum 3
table on right. Three standard off is necessary). 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide box—5.00-inch (127.0 mm).
box heights are available to
accommodate any and all 2. From table on right,
36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide box—6.00-inch (152.4 mm). 3
44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box—8.00-inch (203.2 mm).
enclosure height for
layout arrangements. “X”
unit totals that do not exactly 26X panel = 57 inches 3
match those in table on right (1447.8 mm).
must be rounded off to the 3. Width = 24 inches
Notes
1 Box depth is 10.40 inches (264.2 mm), cover adds 0.90 inches (22.9 mm) to depth.
3
next highest standard (26X, (609.6 mm)—directly
38X, 50X). from layout guide.
800A maximum bus size in 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide box. Flush trims
not available on PRL4B panels. 3
If a calculated “X” total for a
panel exceeds 50X, the panel
4. Enclosure depth =
11.31 inches (287.0 mm)
3
must be split into two or
more separate sections with
—standard for all PRL4
panelboards. 3
“X” space for through-feed
lugs figured in for all but one
section. If a neutral is
PRL4B Layout Example 3
required, a separate neutral
bar and appropriate “X”
20A/1P 20A/1P 1X
3
20A/1P 20A/1P 1X
space must be included in
each section. 20A/1P 20A/1P 1X 3
20A/1P 20A/1P 1X
20A/1P 20A/1P 1X 3
20A/1P 20A/1P 1X
250A/3P 3X 3
250A/3P
400A/3P
3X
4X
3
Main
Lugs
800A
10X
3
Neutral
3
Total = 26X
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Layout for Branch and Horizontally Mounted Main Devices Layout—PRL4B

3
3
Filler 1X Breaker to Fusible Transition, All Widths
Sub Panel
18
3
12X Poles
100A
42 Max.
3 400 Amp. Maximum Bus Rating
20X Poles
3 1P 1P 1X
2P 2P 2X
3 EHD,
FDB, FD, FDE
24-Inch (609.6 mm) Wide Box
HFD, HFDE, FDC, HFDDC 9

3 3P 3P 3X
3 2P 2P 2X
3 EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC

3P 3P 3X
3
250A
JD, HJD, JDC, HJDDC 9
3 2 or 3P 3X
Max.
400A DK, KD, HKD, KDC, HKDDC 9
3 2 or 3P 4X
Max. CKD, CHKD, LHH
3
Load
600A LGE, LGH, LGC, LGU

3P 4X
Max.
3
LD, HLD, CLD, CHLD, LDC, HLDDC 9
Load
600A
2 or 3P 6X
3 Max.
3 2 or 3P 2 or 3P 3X 100A
Max.
FCL, FB-P
3 2 or 3P 2 or 3P 3X
250A
Max.
JD, HJD, JDC
3 400A
Max. LCL, LA-P
2 or 3P 6X
3 MDL, HMDL, HMDLDC 9

CMDL, CHMDL
3
2 or 3P 6X ND, HND, NDC
3
3 2 or 3P 2 or 3P 4X 400A
Max.
DK, KD, HKD,
KDC
3 800A
NB-P, NBDC 9
Max.
3
2 or 3P 6X
1200A
CND, CHND, CNDC
Max.
3 Notes
1 BAB and QBHW breakers with shunt trips require one additional pole space, i.e., single-pole is two-pole size, two-pole is three-pole size, and three-pole is four-pole size.
3 2 If panel contains only BAB or QBHW branch breakers, use a PRL1a panelboard.
3 GHB, HGHB or GHQ breakers cannot be mixed on same subchassis as BAB, QBHW.
3 4 If panel contains only GHB, HGHB or GHQ branch breakers, use a PRL2a panelboard.
5 When only one single-pole breaker of the group is required on either side of chassis, the single-pole breaker space required changes from 1X to 2X.
3
6 Minimum 36-inch (914.4 mm) wide box is required if optional #6–300 kcmil lug is required.
7 MDL main breaker in 24-inch (609.6 mm) wide box, refer to Page V2-T3-70.
8 Optional 750 kcmil terminal requires 44-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box.
3 9 For use on DC systems only.
See Page V2-T3-70 for MLO or Neutral and Vertically Mounted Mains space requirements.
3
3.3
Box Sizing and Selection—PRL4F
Main Lug (MLO), Main Switch, Neutral, Through-Feed (TFL) * = Space available for branch devices. For device sizing, 3
and Sub-Feed Lug (SFL) “X” Space Requirements. (For other see Page V2-T3-75.
configurations not shown, refer to Eaton.)
• = Blank means no bus under cover, to meet NEC cable 3
bending space.
3
PRL4F Layout
3
Standard Main Lug, Through-Feed and Sub-Feed Lugs a Main Switch with Neutral (when required)
(500 kcmil Maximum) (500 kcmil Maximum) 3
MLO, SFL MLO, TFL
N N N Main Switch 3
10X 10X 7X 22X
3
250A a, 400A a, 200A, 400A, Main Switch
600A a, 800A * 600A
* * 3
*
*
7X Through-
Feed Lugs
7X N
3
3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W 3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W 3Ph 4W,
3
3Ph 3W
400A and 600A Vertically Mounted Main Switch 3
MLO MLO, TFL
N N 800A 25X
3
12X 12X
1200A 26X
3
1200A 800A, 800A and 1200A Vertically Mounted
* *
1200A
*
Main Switch b
36-inch (914.4 mm) or
3
44-inch (1117.6 mm)
2X Blank 7X Through-Feed
Lugs
7X N Wide Box 3
3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W 3Ph 4W

3
Optional Main Lugs, Through-Feed and Sub-Feed Lugs a (750 kcmil Maximum) 3
3
MLO, SFL MLO, TFL
N N
3
20X 20X 13X 13X
250A a, 400A a,
3
250A, 400A,
600A a, 800A 600A, 800A
* * * *
3X
Blank 9X Through-
Feed Lugs
3X Blank 9X Through-
Feed Lugs
3
3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W
3
MLO MLO, TFL 3
20X
N
20X
N
15X 15X 3
1200A 1200A 3
* *
* * 3
Blank 11X Through- Blank 11X Through-
5X 5X
Feed Lugs Feed Lugs
3
3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W
Notes
3
3
1 Sub-feed lugs are available 250–600A. For 600A, use 1200A “A” space.
2 800A and 1200A mains available only in vertical mounting.

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Box Dimensions—PRL4F

3 “X” Catalog
3 To determine the dimensions ● PRL4F, three-phase 38X BX3673 73.50 (1866.9) 36.00 (914.4) 11.31 (287.0)
of a given panelboard four-wire, 208Y/120 volt
3 enclosure, make a layout complete with 400A main 50X BX3690 90.00 (2286.0) 36.00 (914.4) 11.31 (287.0)
sketch by fitting together the switch and the following 38X BX4473 73.50 (1866.9) 44.00 (1117.6) 11.31 (287.0)
3 main, branch and lug modules
according to the appropriate
branches:
● One 200A/three-pole
50X BX4490 90.00 (2286.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 11.31 (287.0)
tables in the layout guide.

3 Assign “X” units to each
● Two 100A/three-pole Top and Bottom Gutters
module as shown and obtain
● Two 30A/three-pole 10.63 inches (269.9 mm) minimum.
3 a total “X” number. Panel to have short-circuit
Side Gutters—Minimum
rating of 100 kA symmetrical.
3 The height of the enclosure is
related to the total “X” units Reference PRL4F Layout
● 36-inch (914.4 mm) wide box:
● 8-inch (203.2 mm)—200A maximum
in the layout as shown in Example
3 table on right. Three standard 1. From layout guide,
● 6-inch (152.4 mm)—400–1200A maximum
box heights are available to ● 44-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box:
total “X” height of
3 accommodate any and all panel = 43X. ● 10-inch (254.0 mm)—200A maximum
layout arrangements. “X” ● 8-inch (203.2 mm)—400–1200A
3 unit totals that do not exactly
match those in table on
2. Rounded off to next
higher standard = 50X. Notes
1 Box depth is 10.40-inch (264.2 mm), cover adds 0.90-inch (22.8 mm) to depth.
right must be rounded off
3 to the next higher standard
3. From table on right, Flush trims not available on PRL4F panels.
enclosure height for 50X
(38X, 50X).
3 If a calculated “X” total for a
panel = 90 inches
(2286.0 mm).
3 panel exceeds 50X, the panel

must be split into two or
4. Width = 36 inches
(914.4 mm).
more separate sections with
3 “X” space for through-feed 5. Enclosure depth is
lugs figured in for all but standard for all PRL4
3 one section. If a neutral is panelboards = 11.31
required, a separate neutral inches (287.0 mm).
3 bar and appropriate “X”
space must be included in Type PRL4F
each section. Layout Example
3
400A Neutral 7X
3 30A/3P 30A/3P 4X
100A/3P 100A/3P 4X
3 200A/3P 6X
3
400A three-pole 22X
Main Switch
(Vertical Mounted)
3 Total = 43X
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Layout for Branch and Horizontally Mounted Main Device—PRL4F
3
Fusible to Breaker Transition
3
1X
Requires 1X Filler
30A 30A 4X
3
60A 60A 4X
3
3
100A 100A
3
4X
250V Max. 250V Max.
36-inch (914.4 mm) Wide Box
100A 5X
3
3
200A 6X
3
Main or Branch Switch
3
100A 100A 5X 3
3
400A (11X With
3
9X
Branch Switch Shunt Trip)
600A 11X 3
Branch Switch
3
200A 200A
3
6X
44-inch (1117.6 mm) Wide Box
400A 9X
(11X With 3
Main or Branch Shunt Trip)
3
600A
3
11X
Main or Branch
800A 11X
(16X With 3
Branch Shunt Trip)
3
1200A (16X With
3
15X
Branch Shunt Trip)
▲ Fusible switch may be used as horizontally main. 3

● 400 and 600A horizontally mounted feeder switches in 36-inch (914.4 mm) or 44-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box. 400 and 600A horizontally mounted 3
main switches only in 44-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box. For vertically mounted main, see Page V2-T3-73 for sizing.
Note: See Page V2-T3-73 for MLO or Neutral and Vertically Mounted Main space requirements.
3
3
3
3
3
3
Contents
3 Type PRL4D
Description Page
3 Type PRL1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-26
Type PRL1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-30
3 Type PRL1a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-34
Type PRL2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-38
3 Type PRL2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-42
Type PRL2a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-46
3 Type PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type PRL3E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-58
V2-T3-62
3 Type PRL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type PRL4D
V2-T3-66
Type PRL4D Drawout Molded Case Circuit Breaker Power Panelboard

Box Sizing and Selection—PRL4D . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-80
3 Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-83
Type PRL5P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-86
3
3
3 Type PRL4D
● Drawout molded case
● Interrupting ratings up to
Benefits
● Ease of maintenance
3 circuit breaker power
panelboard ●
200 kAIC symmetrical
Feeder power panelboard
● Faster to remove and
install
3
● Front accessible ● Rated as Service Entrance ● Less downtime
● Front connected Equipment when
appropriately equipped Standards and Certifications
3 Through-the-door design
●
drawout mechanism ● Ideal for: ● UL 67 Listed chassis

● UL 50 Listed box and trim
3 Visual indication of breaker Data centers
● ●
status and position ● Industrial facilities

3 Large grab handles for
●
● Process equipment
easy removal manufacturing
600 Vac maximum
3
●
● Anywhere that requires
● 1200A maximum mains quick change of feeder
devices is needed
3 600A maximum drawout
●
molded case feeder

breakers
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Product Selection
3
Type PRL4D PRL4D Main Lugs and Main Breakers 3
Ampere
Breaker
3
Rating 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Type “X” Space
Main Lugs Only (Fixed-Mounted Only)
3
400 — — — — 10X
3
600 — — — — 10X
800 — — — — 10X 3
1200 — — — — 12X
Main Circuit Breaker (Drawout Only) 1 3
3
600 65 35 18 LGE 9X
600 100 65 35 LGH 9X
600 200 100 50 LGC 9X
3
Main Circuit Breaker (Fixed-Mounted Only) 1
600 65 35 18 LGE 4X 3
600 100 65 35 LGH 4X
600 200 100 50 LGC 4X 3
600
600
65
100
35
65
25
35
CLD 2
CHLD 2
6X
6X
3
600 200 100 50 CLDC 2 6X 3
800 65 50 25 MDL 6X
800 100 65 35 HMDL 6X 3
800 65 50 25 CMDL 2 6X
800 100 65 35 CHMDL 2 6X
3
1200 85 50 25 NGS 6X
3
1200 100 65 35 NGH 6X
1200 200 100 65 NGC 6X 3
1200 65 50 25 CND 2 6X
1200 100 65 35 CHND 2 6X 3
3
1200 200 100 65 CNDC 2 6X
Notes
1 For ground fault protection on main devices, see Modification 10—applies to 310 and 310+ trip units only.
2 100% rated circuit breaker.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
PRL4D Drawout Branch/Feeder Breakers

3
3 Type PRL4D Single Mount Two-Pole and Three-Pole
3
Ampere Breaker
3 Single-Mount Breakers with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units
3 70–250
70–250
85
100
35
65
18
25
JGS
JGH
7X
7X
3 70–250 200 100 35 JGC 7X

250–600 85 35 18 LGS 9X
3 250–600 100 65 35 LGH 9X
250–600 200 100 50 LGC 9X
3 Single-Mount Breakers with Electronic 310+ Trip Units (Three-Pole Only)
3 20–50
20–50
85
100
35
65
18
25
JGS
JGH
7X
7X
3 20–50 200 100 35 JGC 7X

40–100 85 35 18 JGS 7X
3 40–100 100 65 25 JGH 7X
3
40–100 200 100 35 JGC 7X
80–150 85 35 18 JGS 7X
3 80–150 100 65 25 JGH 7X

80–150 200 100 35 JGC 7X
3 100–250 85 35 18 JGS 7X
100–250 100 65 25 JGH 7X
3 100–250 200 100 35 JGC 7X
3
100–250 85 35 18 LGS 9X
100–250 100 65 35 LGH 9X
3 100–250 200 100 50 LGC 9X

200–400 85 35 18 LGS 9X
3 200–400 100 65 35 LGH 9X
200–400 200 100 50 LGC 9X
3 250–600 85 35 18 LGS 9X
3 250–600
250–600
100
200
65
100
35
50
LGH
LGC
9X
9X
3 Provision for Future (Includes Factory-Installed Base Cassette)

20–250 Any JG family branch/feeder breaker 7X
3 100–600 Any LG family branch/feeder breaker 9X
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
For Dual/Twin feeder breakers, select any two breakers within the same “Breaker Type.”
3
Type PRL4D Dual/Twin Mount Two-Pole and Three-Pole 3
3
Ampere Breaker
Dual-/Twin-Mount Breakers with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units 3
70–250
70–250
85
100
35
65
18
25
JGS
JGH
7X
7X
3
70–250 200 100 35 JGC 7X 3
Dual-/Twin-Mount Breakers with Electronic 310+ Trip Units (Three-Pole Only)
20–50 85 35 18 JGS 7X 3
20–50 100 65 25 JGH 7X
20–50 200 100 35 JGC 7X
3
40–100 85 35 18 JGS 7X
3
40–100 100 65 25 JGH 7X
40–100 200 100 35 JGC 7X 3
80–150 85 35 18 JGS 7X
80–150 100 65 25 JGH 7X 3
3
80–150 200 100 35 JGC 7X
100–250 85 35 18 JGS 7X
100–250 100 65 25 JGH 7X
3
100–250 200 100 35 JGC 7X
Provision for Future (Includes Factory-Installed Base Cassette) 3
20–250 Any JG Family Branch/Feeder Breaker 7X
100–600 Any LG Family Branch/Feeder Breaker 9X 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Box Sizing and Selection—PRL4D

3 Main Lug Only (MLO), Main Breaker, Neutral, Through-Feed Lug * = Space available for branch devices. For device sizing,
(TFL) and Sub-Feed Lug (SFL) “X” Space Requirements. (For see Page V2-T3-82.
3 other configurations not shown, refer to Eaton.)
• = Blank means no bus under cover, to meet NEC cable
bending space.
3
3 PRL4D Layout
Standard Main Lug, Through-Feed and Sub-Feed Lugs a Main Breaker with Neutral (when required)
3 (500 kcmil Maximum) (500 kcmil Maximum)
MLO, SFL MLO, TFL
3 10X
N
10X
N
7X
N Main Breaker
19X
N
3 250A a, 400A a, 250A, 400A, Main Breaker

600A a, 800A
3 *
*
600A, 800A
*
*
*
3 7X Through-
Feed Lugs
3 3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W 3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W 3Ph 4W,

3Ph 3W
3 800A Vertically Mtd. MDL Main Breaker only in 24-inch (609.6 mm) wide box.
Available with 38X and 50X Panel Height only.
MLO MLO, TFL
3 N N N
2X Blank
12X 12X 7X
3 Main Breaker
1200A 1200A Main Breaker
3 36-inch
(914.4 mm) * *
36-inch
(914.4 mm) *
Minimum Minimum *
3 Width 2X Blank 7X Through-
Feed Lugs
Width 2X Blank
2X Blank
3 3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W 3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W
3 Optional Main Lugs, Through-Feed and Sub-Feed Lugs a (750 kcmil Maximum)
MLO, SFL MLO, TFL
3
N N
20X 20X 13X 13X
3
250A a, 400A a, 250A, 400A,
3 600A a, 800A
*
600A, 800A
*
* *
3 3X Blank 9X Through-
Feed Lugs 3X Blank 9X Through-
Feed Lugs
3 3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W
3 MLO MLO, TFL
3 20X
N
20X
N
15X 15X
3 1200A
36-inch
120A
36-inch
(914.4 mm) * * (914.4 mm) * *
3 Minimum
Minimum
5X 11X Feed Lugs 5X 11X Feed Lugs
3
3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W
3
Note
3 1 Sub-feed lugs are available 250–600A. For 600A, use 1200A “A” space.

3.3
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Box Dimensions—PRL4D
“X” Catalog
3
To determine the dimensions ● One PRL4D panelboard,
38X BX3673 73.50 (1866.9) 36.00 (914.4) 11.31 (287.0)
3
of a given panelboard 480Y/277 Vac, three-
enclosure, make a layout
sketch by fitting together the
phase, four-wire, 65 kA,
800A main lugs only with:
50X BX3690 90.00 (2286.0) 36.00 (914.4) 11.31 (287.0)
3
38X BX4473 73.50 (1866.9) 44.00 (1117.6) 11.31 (287.0)
main, branch and lug modules
according to the appropriate
● One JGS 200A/
three-pole
50X BX4490 90.00 (2286.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 11.31 (287.0) 3
tables in the layout guide.
Assign “X” units to each
● One LGS 400A/
three-pole
Top and Bottom Gutters 3
module as shown and obtain 10.63 inches (269.9 mm) minimum.
a total “X” number.
● One JGS 150A/
three-pole dual mount Side Gutters—Minimum
3
The height of the enclosure is
related to the total “X” units
● One JGS 100A/
three-pole dual mount
●
●
36-inch (914.4 mm) wide box: 6-inch (152.4 mm)
44-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box: 8-inch (203.2 mm)
3
in the layout as shown in
table on right. Three standard Reference PRL4D Layout 3
box heights are available to Example
accommodate any and all
layout arrangements. “X”
1. From layout guide,
Type PRL4D Layout Example
3
total “X” height of JGS 200A three-pole single feeder 7X
unit totals that do not exactly
match those in table on
panel = 33X.
LGS 400A three-pole single feeder 9X
3
right must be rounded off 2. From table on right, 33X
to the next higher standard must use minimum 38X
JGS 150A
three-pole dual feeder
JGS 150A
three-pole dual feeder
7X
3
(38X, 50X). dimensions. Minimum
3
Main Lugs 800A 10X
box height is 73.50
If a calculated “X” total for a inches (1866.9 mm).
panel exceeds 50X, the panel
must be split into two or 3. From the layout for
Neutral
Total = 33X
3
more separate sections with branch and main devices,
“X” space for through-feed find minimum box width 3
lugs figured in for all but requirements for mains
3
and branch/feeder Notes
one section. If a neutral is 1 Box depth is 10.40-inch (264.2 mm), cover adds 0.90-inch (22.8 mm) to depth.
required, a separate neutral devices.
3
bar and appropriate “X” Flush trims not available on PRL4D panels.
● JGS single minimum Door-to-door option not available on PRL4D panels.
space must be included in
width: 36 inches
each section.
● LGS single minimum 3
width: 36 inches
● JGS dual minimum width: 3
44 inches
As the JGS duals require a 3
minimum of a 44-inch-wide
box, the minimum box width
is 44 inches.
3
4. From PRL4D Layout 3
Example, the correct
minimum box selection
is BX4473, which is
3
73.50 inches H x 44.00
inches W x 11.31 inches D 3
(1866.9 mm H x1117.6
mm W x 287.0 mm D). 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Layout for Branch and Horizontally Mounted Main Devices—PRL4D

3
Instructions
3 Determine box size by locating all main and feeder devices in your panel. The width of box is determined by the maximum box size
shown for each device. For main lugs, through-feed lugs and sub-feed lugs, refer to Page V2-T3-80.
3
3 2 or 3P
Feeder Only 250A JGS, JGH, JGC
3
7X
Single Drawout Max.
3
3 2 or 3P
Main or Feeder 600A
9X LGS, LGH, LGC
Single Drawout Max.
3
3 2 or 3P
Main Only 4X 600A
LGS, LGH, LGC
3 Fixed Mount Max.
3 2 or 3P
Main Only 6X
600A
CLD 1 , CHLD 1, CLDC 1
Max.
Fixed Mount
3
3 2 or 3P
Main Only 800A MDL, HMDL, CMDL 1,
6X
Max. CHMDL 1
3
Fixed Mount
3 2 or 3P
Main Only 1200A
6X
Max. NGS 2 , NGH 2, NGC 2
3 Fixed Mount
3 2 or 3P 2 or 3P
250A
3 Feeder Only Feeder Only 7X JGS, JGH, JGC
Max.
Dual Drawout Dual Drawout
3
2 or 3P
3 Main Only
Fixed Mount
6X 1200A
Max.
NGSC 3, NGHC 3 , NGCC 3
3
Notes
3 1 100% rated breaker.
2 Optional 750 kcmil terminal requires 44-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box.
3
3 Contact Eaton for availability.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Accessories and Modifications
3
PRL4D Modifications 1. Ambient Compensating
Modification Item Number

Breakers 3
For ambient compensating
Ambient compensating breakers 1 breakers (where available) in 3
lieu of standard breakers, add
Breaker accessories—internal 2
Complete assembly 3
10% to panelboard branch
breaker and to main breaker
3
list prices, if required.
Compression type lugs 4 (Not UL Listed.) 3
Conduit covers 5
Copper lugs/terminals 6 2. Breaker Accessories—Internal (Only One Accessory Per Position) 3

Copper main bus 7 Accessories 3
Density rated bus 8 Breaker Device
Directory frame—metal 9
Type Mounting Internal Breaker Accessory 3
JG family Drawout 1 Auxiliary switch 1A-1B
Electronic trip units 10 JG family Drawout 1 Auxiliary switch 2A-2B 3
Ground bars 11
3
JG family Drawout 1 Bell alarm
Ground fault protection 12 JG family Drawout 1 High load alarm w/trip
Infrared (IR) viewing windows 13 JG family Drawout 1 Ground fault alarm w/trip
3
JG family Drawout 2 Undervoltage release
Handle lock-off device 14
Nameplates 15
JG family Drawout 2 Zone selective interlock 3
LG family Drawout 1 Auxiliary switch 1A-1B
Permanent circuit numbers 16
LG family Drawout 1 Auxiliary switch 2A-2B 3
Seismically qualified 17
3
LG family Drawout 1 Bell alarm
Service entrance equipment rated 18 LG family Drawout 1 High load alarm w/trip
Shunt trips 19 LG family Drawout 1 Ground fault alarm w/trip 3
Sub-feed lugs 20 LG family Drawout 2 Undervoltage release 3
Surge protective devices 21 LG family Drawout 2 Zone selective interlock 3

LG family Fixed Auxiliary switch 1A-1B
Through-feed lugs 22
LG family Fixed Auxiliary switch 2A-2B
3
Touchup paint 23
LG family Fixed Bell alarm
3
LG family Fixed High load alarm w/trip
LG family Fixed Ground fault alarm w/trip 3
LG family Fixed Undervoltage release 3
LG family Fixed Zone selective interlock 3
3
MDL family Fixed Auxiliary switch 1A-1B
MDL family Fixed Auxiliary switch 2A-2B
MDL family Fixed Auxiliary switch 1A-1B w/alarm
3
MDL family Fixed Auxiliary switch 2A-2B w/alarm
NG family Fixed Auxiliary switch 1A-1B 3
NG family Fixed Auxiliary switch 2A-2B
NG family Fixed Bell alarm 3
NG family
NG family
Fixed
Fixed
High load alarm w/trip
Ground fault alarm w/trip
3
NG family Fixed Undervoltage release 3 3
NG family Fixed Zone selective interlock
Notes 3
1 Accessories wired to a pull-apart terminal block. Right position only.
2 Accessories wired to a pull-apart terminal block. Left position only. 3
3 Not available when breaker is equipped with ARMS trip unit.
3
3
3. Complete Assembly 8. Density Rated Bus The following electronic trip units integrate Eaton's Arcflash
3 Complete assembly of Standard main bus ampere Reduction Maintenance System within the trip unit.
panelboard box, interior and rating is determined by UL
3
Breaker Frame Family Trip Unit Type
trim prior to shipment, when listed temperature rise
Drawout Feeder or Main LGS, LGH, LGC Digitrip 310+ ALSI
requested on order. testing. Density rated bus is
3
Digitrip 310+ ALSIG
defined at 750A per square
4. Compression Main Lugs inch for aluminum bus and
3 Al/Cu Burndy Range Taking
Type.
1000A per square inch for
copper bus. Adder for
Electronic Trip Units for Fixed-Mounted Mains Only.
Trip Unit
3 aluminum density rated bus is Breaker Frame Family Trip Unit Type Functionality 1
Modification 4 in addition to the base price. LGS, LGH, LGC Digitrip 310+ LS
Adder for copper density
3 Main Lug PRL4D Lug Digitrip 310+ LSI
Amperes Wire Range rated bus is in addition to Digitrip 310+ LSG
the base price plus the Digitrip 310+ LSIG
3 800
1200
(3) 500–750 kcmil
(4) #2–600 kcmil
appropriate adder for copper
bus. See Modification 7.
Digitrip 310+
Digitrip 310+
ALSI 2
ALSIG 2
3 (4) 500–750 kcmil

Modification 8
CLD, CHLD, CLDC Digitrip 310
Digitrip 310
LS
LSI
5. Conduit Covers Digitrip 310 LSG
3 Fabricated sheet metal to
Ampere Rating Digitrip 310 LSIG
cover open conduits above MDL, HMDL, CMDL, CHMDL Digitrip 310 LS
Aluminum—750A per Square Inch
3 and/or below standard 600
Digitrip 310
Digitrip 310
LSI
LSG
Type 1 box. Digitrip 310 LSIG
3 Modification 5
800
NGS, NGH, NGC Digitrip 310+ 3 LS
1000 Digitrip 310+ 3 LSI
3 Description
1200
Digitrip 310+ 3
Digitrip 310+ 3
LSG
LSIG
Conduit enclosing shield—open back Digitrip 310+ 3 ALSI 2
3 Conduit enclosing shield—solid back
Copper—1000A per Square Inch Digitrip 310+ 3 ALSIG 2
600 CND, CHND, CNDC Digitrip 310 4 LS
3 6. Copper Lugs/Terminals 800
Digitrip 310 4
Digitrip 310 4
LSI
LSG
Optional copper mechanical
3
Digitrip 310 4 LSIG
main lugs only and includes 1000
main incoming neutral lug. 1200 11. Ground Bars
3 Modification 6 9. Directory Frame—Metal Modification 11
3 Main Lug
Amperes
PRL4D Lug
Wire Range
Metal directory frame in lieu Description Bar Type
of standard non-metallic Aluminum bar for aluminum Standard, attached to box
3 600 (2) 1/0–600 kcmil pocket directory holder. and copper conductors Insulated/isolated ground bar
800 (2) 1/0–600 kcmil Copper bar for use with Standard, attached to box
3 1200 (3) 1/0–600 kcmil
Modification 9
Directory Frame Type
copper only conductors Insulated/isolated bar
Notes
3 7. Copper Main Busbars Metal frame, plastic cover 1 L = Adjustable long delay pickup
Optional copper busbars are S = Adjustable short delay pickup w/fixed short delay
3 available in all ampere ratings. 10. Electronic Trip Units I = Adjustable instantaneous pickup
G = Adjustable ground fault pickup
Thermal-magnetic trip units A = Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
3 Modification 7
Ampere Bare Copper Silver-Plated
are standard. For electronic
trip units, select appropriate
2 Trip unit includes Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System.
3 Digitrip 310+ is standard for the NGS, NGH and NGC.
breaker from the electronic
3
Range Chassis Bus Copper Bus 4 Digitrip 310 is standard for CND, CHND and CNDC.
trip section of Pages
600
V2-T3-78 and V2-T3-79.
3 800 See selection below for
1000 electronic trip units.
3 1200
Modification 10
3 Breaker
Frame Trip Unit
Family Type
3 Drawout Feeder Digitrip 310+ LS
JGS, JGH, JGC Digitrip 310+ LSI
3 Digitrip 310+ LSG
Digitrip 310+ LSIG
3 Drawout Feeder Digitrip 310+ LS

or Main LGS, LGH, Digitrip 310+ LSI
3
LGC Digitrip 310+ LSG
Digitrip 310+ LSIG

3.3
12. Ground Fault Protection 18. Service Entrance Equipment 21. Surge Protective Devices
Refer to Modification 10 for Service Entrance labeling as (SPD) 3
ground fault trip units. detailed under the “Service Package includes SPD unit
Entrance Equipment” per UL and integral circuit breaker 3
13. Infrared (IR) Viewing and NEC. Only panelboards disconnect (30A) connected
Windows meeting these requirements to the chassis bus. 3
Infrared viewing windows for may be labeled as such. The
main devices and drawout
single-mounted feeder
requirement or service
entrance labeling must be
Modification 21
Surge Current Rating 50 80 100 120 160 200 250 300 400
3
3
devices. noted on the order. Includes
SPD Package Options—Basic Package
neutral disconnect link and
Modification 13 labeling “Suitable For LED monitor, L-N, L-G, L-L ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Overcurrent IR Window Use as Service Equipment” and N-G 3
Device Manufacturer (SUSE). Ground bar must be Standard Package
All fixed mount Iriss

ordered separately. See
Modification 11.
LED monitor, L-N, L-G, L-L and ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 3
mains Hawk (Fluke) N-G. EMI/RFI filtering. Audible
Single drawout Iriss 19. Shunt Trip for Main or Feeder

alarm with disable switch.
Form C relay contact. 3
feeder breakers 1 Hawk (Fluke) Breakers
For tripping breaker from
Premium Package
LED monitor, L-N, L-G, L-L and ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
3
14. Handle Lock-Off Devices for remote point. Voltage and
Breakers
Contact Eaton for a list of
frequency must be specified
N-G. EMI/RFI filtering. Audible
alarm with disable switch. 3
when ordering shunt trips. Form C relay contact. Six-digit
padlockable and non-
padlockable circuit breaker
Wiring to terminal block is
included with the drawout
LCD display. Counts surges in
all modes. Nonvolatile memory
3
handle lock-offs. (no battery backup). Reset
molded case product as
standard. For all others
button designed to prevent
accidental resets.
3
15. Nameplates, Engraved wired to terminal block,
Field-attached nameplates. contact Eaton. 22. Through-Feed Lugs 23. Touchup Paint 3
Modification 15 20. Sub-Feed Lugs
Mechanical Al/Cu lugs.
Compression or copper Modification 23 3
Description Available only on main lug lugs require additional price Description
Mastic back, engraved, black with only panelboards. adder from Modification 4 12 oz spray can. ANSI-61 light gray indoor
3
white lettering
Not available on service Compression Lug or
Mastic back, engraved, colors other entrance panelboards with Modification 6 Copper Case lot of 12—12 oz spray can. ANSI-61
light gray indoor 3
than black main lugs using the six Lugs/Terminals.
Nameplates, screw attached disconnect rule.
Modification 22
Note
1 Available on only single-mounted
3
Mechanical Al/Cu lugs. Refer to PRL4D Layout.
3
drawout. Not available on dual-mounted
16. Permanent Circuit Numbers
Compression or copper body Panel Main
feeder devices.
Permanently attached micarta lugs require additional price Ampere Box Height
circuit numbering. adder from Modification 4 or Rating Addition 3
Modification 6, as
600 7X
3
17. Seismically Qualified appropriate.
For seismically qualified 800 7X
PRL4D panelboards, request
seismic labeling on order.
Modification 20
Panel
1200 9X
3
3
Ampere Box Height
Rating Addition
3
600 4X
800 6X
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Contents
3 Type PRL5P
Description Page
3 Type PRL1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-26
Type PRL1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-30
3 Type PRL1a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-34
Type PRL2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-38
3 Type PRL2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-42
Type PRL2a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-46
Type PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-58
3 Type PRL3E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-62
Type PRL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-66
3 Type PRL4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-76
Type PRL5P
3 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-88
3 Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-88
V2-T3-88
3 Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-89
V2-T3-94
3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-94
3 Product Overview
The PRL5P panelboard Plug-On Mains and Two Enclosure Widths Provide 48-Inch (1219.2 mm) Wide.
3 incorporates Eaton’s plug-on Branches provide the Greater Flexibility Provides for mains up to
power panelboard experience flexibility to move devices on 30-Inch (762.0 mm) Wide. 1200A. The 1200A lug
3 with modern manufacturing
technology to provide the
factory-assembled panels
after the boards are received
The narrowest enclosure in adapter unit accepts up to
750 kcmil conductors. Two
the industry for an 800A
3 most flexible plug-on design
in the industry.
at the job site. The electrician
may move branch devices
main, breaker or lug, and up
to 600A branch breakers—
600A breakers can be
mounted across from one
and place them into a another. Another exclusive
3
while providing ample wiring
Designed to eliminate the configuration that fits the allows breakers of different
bending space. An industry
multitude of parts associated particular wiring needs of that sizes to be mounted across
exclusive is the ability to
3 with other similar products,
the PRL5P panelboard is the
installation. mount two 225A, 480 Vac from one another, providing
breakers on the same adapter the ability to maximize space
choice for applications where Breakers are mounted to an
3 additions and changes must adapter that includes the bus
unit. It requires half the space
necessitated by other
within the panel. There are no
restrictions or predetermined
be fast and convenient. connection hardware. The
3 breaker to bus bar connection
products. spaces where branch devices
must be placed.
is positive and secure. This
3 proven connection has been
utilized by Eaton in plug-on
3 power panelboards since
1984.
3
3
3
3
Panelboard Installation
Type PRL5P—48-Inch (1219.2 mm) Wide
Type PRL5P—30-Inch (762.0 mm) Wide
3
3
3
3.3
Circuit Breaker and Lug Adapter Units
Breaker adapter units utilize 3
molded case circuit breakers
that provide increased 3
performance in considerably
less space than standard 3
breakers. They’re available 1200A Main Lug Unit
from 15–1200A at 600 Vac
maximum. A wide range of
600A L-Frame Breaker
3
integrally mounted breaker
accessories are available. 3
Main and through-feed lug
adapter units are available
3
and are mounted similar to
the breakers. Lug units are 400A K-Frame Breaker
An Oversized Area is Provided for
3
available up to 1200A. Neutral Connections with Ample
Breaker and lug attachment

Lugs for Ease of Installation 3
units can withstand fault
currents up to 200 kA rms 3
symmetrical.
Dual-Mounted 225A F-Frame Breakers
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Contents
3 Type PRL5P
Description Page
3 Type PRL1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-26
Type PRL1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-30
3 Type PRL1a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-34
Type PRL2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-38
3 Type PRL2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-42
Type PRL2a-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-46
3 Type PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type PRL3E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-58
V2-T3-62
3 Type PRL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type PRL4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V2-T3-66
V2-T3-76
3 Type PRL5P
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-86
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-92
3 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-94
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-94
3
3 Type PRL5P
● 600 Vac maximum
● Power distribution
● UL 67, UL 50
3 ●
(250 Vdc)
panelboard
W-P-115c
3
single-phase three-wire 200 kA symmetrical additional information
1200A maximum mains
3
● ● Suitable for use as Service
● 1200A maximum Entrance Equipment, when
branch devices specified on the order
3 ● Plug-on branch devices ● See Pages V2-T3-7
through V2-T3-23 for
3 Factory assembled
●
● Refer to Pages V2-T3-7 additional information

and V2-T3-88 for additional
3 information
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Product Selection
3
Panelboard Selection and Refer to layout data from the
Layout following tables. Make a 3
Select either single-row or layout sketch of the main and
double-row bus chassis.
Single-row bus chassis—
branch devices utilizing either
a single-row or double-row
3
maximum 800 ampere main
breaker or main lug only.
bus chassis indicating the
“X” space for each device. 3
Select main device and “X” The maximum total “X”
space from table below. space cannot exceed 40X for 3
Select branch devices and any panelboard. Should more
corresponding “X” space than 40X be required, add the 3
from the following tables. appropriate through-feed lug
adapter or breaker to feed an
additional panelboard.
3
PRL5P 1
3
Type PRL5P
Main
Ampere
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) Main
Device
Main
“X”
3
Rating 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc Type Space
Main Lug Only Single-Row Bus
3
400
600
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Lug
Lug
8X
8X
3
800 — — — — Lug 8X 3
Main Lug Only Double-Row Bus
800 — — — — Lug 7X 3
3
1200 — — — — Lug 7X
Main Breaker Single-Row Bus
400 65 — — 10 DK 4X
3
400 65 35 25 10 KD 4X
400 100 65 35 22 HKD 4X 3
400 200 100 65 22 KDC 4X
600 35 35 25 22 LD 6X 3
600
600
100
200
65
100
35
35
25
25
HL
LDC
6X
6X
3
800 65 50 25 22 MDL 6X 3
800 100 65 35 25 HMDL 6X
Main Breaker Double-Row Bus 3
800 65 50 25 22 MDL 6X
800 100 65 35 25 HMDL 6X 3
1200
1200
65
100
50
65
25
35
—
—
ND
HND
6X
6X
3
1200 200 100 65 — NDC 6X 3
3
Branch Devices—Single-Pole Breakers in Single Adapter Units—PRL5P
Ampere Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) Breaker 3
Rating 120 Vac 240 Vac 277 Vac 125 Vdc Type “X” Type
15–60 14 — 14 10 EHD 2X, 3X 3
3
15–60 35 — 35 10 FD 2X, 3X
15–60 65 — 65 10 HFD 2X, 3X
Note 3
1 Includes aluminum bus chassis, box, trim, main and neutral (if required).
3
3
Branch Devices—Two- and Three-Pole Breakers in Single Adapter Units—PRL5P

3 Ampere Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) Breaker “X”
3 Rating
100–225
240 Vac
22
480 Vac
—
600 Vac
—
250 Vdc
—
Type
EDB
Space
3X
3 100–225 42 — — — EDS 3X
100–225 65 — — — ED 3X
3 100–225 100 — — — EDH 3X
3
100–225 200 — — — EDC 3X
15–60 18 14 — 10 EHD 3X
3 70–100 18 14 — 10 EHD 3X
15–60 65 35 18 10 FD 3X
3 70–100 65 35 18 10 FD 3X
110–225 65 35 18 10 FD 3X
3 15–60 100 65 25 22 HFD 3X
3 70–100
110–225
10
100
65
65
25
25
22
22
HFD
HFD
3X
3X
3 15–60 200 100 35 22 FDC 3X

70–100 200 100 35 22 FDC 3X
3 110–225 200 100 35 22 FDC 3X
70–225 65 35 18 10 JD 3X
3 250 65 35 18 10 JD 3X
3 70–225
250
100
100
65
65
25
25
22
22
HJD
HJD
3X
3X
3 70–225 200 10 35 22 JDC 3X

250 200 100 35 22 JDC 3X
3 100–400 65 — — — DK 4X
3
250–400 65 35 25 10 KD 4X
250–400 100 65 35 22 HKD 4X
3 250–400 200 100 65 22 KDC 4X

300–600 65 35 25 22 LD 6X
3 300–600 100 65 35 25 HLD 6X
300–600 200 100 50 25 LDC 6X
3 400–800 65 50 25 22 MDL 1 6X
3 400–800
400–800
100
65
65
50
35
25
25
—
HMDL 1
ND 1
6X
6X
3 400–800 100 65 35 — HND 1 6X

400–800 200 100 65 — NDC 1 6X
3 600–1200 65 50 25 — ND 1 6X
600–1200 100 65 35 — HND 1 6X
3 600–1200 200 100 65 — NDC 1 6X
3
Branch Devices—Sub-Feed Lug Units—PRL5P
3 Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical)
Ampere Breaker “X”
3 Rating 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc Type Space
400 — — — — Lug 8X
3 600 — — — — Lug 8X
800 — — — — Lug 8X
3 1200 — — — — Lug 1 7X
3 Note
1 For use only in double-row chassis panelboards only.
3
3.3
Branch Devices—Dual Breaker Adapters—PRL5P
Ampere Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) Breaker “X”
3
Rating
100–225
240 Vac
65
480 Vac
—
600 Vac
—
250 Vdc
—
Type
ED
Space
3X
3
100–225 100 — — — EDH 3X 3
100–225 200 — — — EDC 3X
15–60 18 14 — 10 EHD 3X 3
3
70–100 18 14 — 10 EHD 3X
15–60 65 35 18 10 FD 3X
70–100 65 35 18 10 FD 3X
3
110–225 65 35 18 10 FD 3X
15–60 100 65 25 22 HFD 3X 3
70–100 100 65 25 22 HFD 3X
110–225 100 65 25 22 HFD 3X 3
3
15–60 200 100 35 22 FDC 3X
70–100 200 100 35 22 FDC 3X
110–225 200 100 35 22 FDC 3X
3
Note: Any two breakers listed above may be mounted on the same 2X or 3X dual breaker adapter. Dual breaker
adapters may be in single- or double-row chassis. Dual breaker adapters can NOT be mounted across from
another in a double-row chassis.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Modifications
3
1. Ambient Compensating 6. Copper Main Bus 9. Trim and Door Modifications
3 Breakers —Special Fronts and Doors
For ambient compensating Modification 6
3 breakers (where available) in Panel Construction
Modification 9
lieu of standard breakers, add Single-bus interior
Type
3 10% to panelboard branch

breaker and to main breaker Double-bus interior
Hinged door over devices for
Type 1 Enclosure
list prices, if required.
3 (Not UL listed.) 6a. Silver-Plated Copper 10. Ground Bar
Main Bus
3 2. Bus Density For silver-plated copper Modification 10
Main bus ampere rating is panelboard main bus and/or
3 determined by UL listed connectors, add as follows:
Description
Add per panel
temperature test. 1000A per
3 square inch copper is Modification 6a
11. Solid-State Trip Units
available and included in Main Bus Ratings Amperes
3 copper bus price addition. Single-bus interior
Modification 11
Double-bus interior
3 3. Special Cabinet (Box)
Construction
Description
K-, L-, M-Frame Circuit Breaker
6b. Copper Neutral
3 Modification 3 Digitrip RMS310 LS
Modification 6b Digitrip RMS310 LSI
Modification
3 Type 3R Enclosure
Panel Construction Digitrip RMS310 LSG
Single-bus—800A maximum
3 Add per panel Digitrip RMS310 LSIG
Double-bus—1200A maximum N-Frame Circuit Breaker
3 4. Complete Assembly
7. Copper Lugs
Digitrip RMS310 LS
Complete assembly of Digitrip RMS310 LSI
3 panelboard box, interior and
trim prior to shipment when
Optional copper only
mechanical main lugs
Digitrip RMS310 LSG
required. (includes main incoming Digitrip RMS310 LSIG

3 neutral lugs).
Modification 4 12. Circuit Breaker Handle
3 Description
Modification 7 Lockoff Devices
Main Lug Amperes
3
Add per panel Modification 12
400
Description
3 5. Conduit Covers 600
Non-padlockable
Fabricated sheet metal to 800
Padlockable
3 cover open conduits above
and/or below standard Type 1
1200
box. 13. Nameplates, Engraved

3 8. Directory Frame—Metal
Modification 5 Modification 13
Modification 8
3 Cover Type
Frame Type
Type
Mastic back and installed by
3
Conduit enclosing shield (open back)
Metal frame, plastic cover purchaser, per nameplate
Fixed to panel trim with two
3 screws or rivets, per nameplate
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
14. Copper Wire Only Terminals for Molded Case Circuit Breakers
To replace standard Al/Cu terminals. 3
Modification 14 3
Breaker Maximum Breaker Terminal Wire
Frame Ampere Rating Material Range 3
F 225 Copper #4–4/0
J 250 Stainless Steel #4–350 3
K 225
350
Copper
Copper
(1) #3–350
(1) 250–500
3
400 Copper (2) 3/0–250 3
L 600 Copper (2) 250–500
M 600 Copper (2) #2/0–500 3
3
800 Copper (3) #3/0–300
N 700 Copper (2) #2/0–500
1000 Copper (3) #3/0–500
3
1200 Copper (4) #3/0–400
3
15. Painting and Special 18. Shunt Trip for Main or Branch
Coatings
Standard boxes are code-
Circuit Breaker
For tripping circuit breaker
3
gauge galvanized sheet steel.
Standard trims are code-
from a remote point. Voltage
and frequency must be 3
gauge sheet steel with a rust specified. Wiring to terminal
inhibiting phosphatized blocks is not included. 3
coating and finished with Standard leads extend 18
ANSI-61. inches (457.2 mm) out 3
of breaker.
Modification 15
Circuit breakers with factory 3
Description
installed 120, 240 or 480 Vac
Painted Boxes (ANSI-61) shunt trips are available with 3
Painted Trims or Boxes UL listing as shown
(other than ANSI-61) in table below. 3
16. Permanent Circuit Numbers
Modification 18
Description
3
Modification 16 Add per device 3
Description
To provide permanently 19. Touchup Paint 3
attached Micarta circuit numbers.
Modification 19
Type
3
17. Service Entrance
To provide a Service Entrance 12 oz. spray can ANSI-61
light gray Indoor
3
Label as detailed under the
“Service Entrance
Equipment” in application
Case lot of 12—12 oz. spray cans
ANSI-61 light gray indoor
3
Single style
3
considerations. Only
panelboards meeting these
requirements can be labeled
as such. The requirement for 3
a Service Entrance Label
must be noted on order entry.
Includes neutral disconnect
3
link and Service Entrance
Equipment Label. (Ground bar 3
not included—
see Modification 10.) 3
Modification 17 3
Description
Add per panel 3

3
PRL5P Maximum Component Unit Ampere Rating
3 Total “X” Maximum Ampere Rating of Plug-on Components
Bus Chassis Type Space 1 Main Lugs Branch Lugs Main Breaker Branch Breaker
3 Single-row bus 24X 800 600 800 600
3
32X 800 600 800 600
40X 800 600 800 600
3 Double-row bus 24X 1200 1200 1200 1200

32X 1200 1200 1200 1200
3 40X 1200 1200 1200 1200
3
Main Lug and Sub-Feed Lug Unit—PRL5P
3 Ampere “X” Mechanical Lug Size and Number
Rating Space Al/Cu Rated
3 Single Bus Connection
3
400 8X (1) 1/0–500 kcmil or (2) 1/0–250 kcmil
600 8X (2) #4–500 kcmil
3 800 8X (2) #2–500 kcmil or (3) #2–400 kcmil

Double Bus Connection
3 400–1200 7X (4) #4–750 kcmil
3
Dimensions
3 Layout Information—PRL5P Box Sizes

Total “X”
3
Bus Chassis Type Space 1 Box Width Box Height
Single-row bus 24X 30.00 (762.0) 64.00 (1625.6)
3 32X 30.00 (762.0) 75.00 (1905.0)

40X 30.00 (762.0) 86.00 (2184.4)
3 Double-row bus 24X 48.00 (1219.2) 64.00 (1625.6)
32X 48.00)1219.2) 75.00 (1905.0)
3 40X 48.00 (1219.2) 86.00 (2184.4)
3 Note
1 Deduct “X“ space for main breaker or lugs from the total available “X” spaces listed above.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.3
Chassis Layout
3
PRL5P Chassis Layout—“X” Unit Layout of Circuit Breaker and Lug Units—X = 1.38 Inches (34.9 mm)
3
Double-Bus Interior Mounted in Single-Bus Interior in
48-Inch (1219.2 mm) Wide Enclosure 30-Inch (762.0 mm) Wide Enclosure 3
48.00
(1219.2) 10.00
30.00
(762.0) 10.00 3
(254.0) (254.0)
Neutral — No "X" Space Required Neutral — No "X" Space Required

3
3
Top or Bottom Top or Bottom
Two-Pole Two-Pole Two-Pole

2X 2X 2X
EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC
3X
Three-Pole
EHD, FD, HFD, FDC,
Three-Pole
EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, 3X
Two-Pole Two-Pole
EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, 2X 3
EDH, EDC EDH, EDC
3
ED, EDH, EDC ED, EDH, EDC Three-Pole Three-Pole
Two-Pole Two-Pole EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, 3X
2X EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, Blank Wireway a 2X EDH, EDC EDH, EDC
ED, EDH, EDC ED, EDH, EDC
3
Two-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
2X Blank Wireway a EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, 2X
ED, EDH, EDC ED, EDH, EDC EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, 3X
Three-Pole Three-Pole EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC
3X EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, EHD, FD, HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC ED, EDH, EDC
Blank Wireway a 3X
Two- or Three-Pole
JD, HJD, JDC 3X
3
4X Filler Plate
Two- or Three-Pole
DK, KD, HKD, KDC
4X Bus Cover c 1X-6X 3
3X
Two- or Three-Pole
Two- or Three-Pole b
DK, KD, HKD, KDC 4X
3
JD, HJD, JDC Main or Branch
3
Two- or Three-Pole
LD, HLD, LDC 6X
3X Filler Plate
Two- or Three-Pole b
LD, HLD, LDC
Main or Branch
6X 3
6X 800A MDL, HMDL b
Main or Branch
6X 3
800A MDL, HMDL b
Main Only
6X 3
6X 800A ND, HND, NDC b 6X
3
Main or Branch
3
Main Lug or Sub-feed Lug Kit b
3
8X
800A Max.
1200A ND, HND, NDC b
6X 6X
Main or Branch
3
7.00 10.00
10.00
(177.8)
(254.0)
(254.0)
3
Main Lug or Sub-feed Lug Kit
7X 7X
1200A Maximum
3
10.00
(254.0) 10.00
10.00
(254.0)
3
(254.0)
3
Notes
1 Blank wireway fillers are required opposite any dual breaker unit. 3
2 If used as a main device, must be mounted at the neutral end of panel.
3 Fixed bus covers are required for unused spaces if NEC six circuit disconnect rule is to be met.
3
3
3
3
3
Elevator Control Panelboard
Contents
3 Elevator Control Panelboard
Description Page
3 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-97
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 Product Description Application Description Standards and Certifications
● 600 Vac maximum ● Instrument protection ● UL 67 panelboards
3 ● Three-phase four-wire ● Fully rated ● UL 50 enclosures
● 800A maximum mains ● Interrupting ratings up to ● UL 98 fusible switches
3 ● 30–200A branch devices 200 kA symmetrical when
● Short-circuit current rating protected by fuse
3 up to 200 kA rms ● Provides selective
is intended to meet the:
symmetrical coordination to 0.01 ● NFPA 70 (National

3 ● Elevator controls including seconds with the
appropriate upstream
Electrical Code)
shunt trip, CPT, indicating ● NFPA 72 (National Fire
3 lights and keyed selector overcurrent protective
device
Alarm Code)
switch ● ANSI/ASME A17.1
3 Eaton’s Elevator Control
●
(Safety Code for Elevators
Panelboard provides and Escalators)
significant space savings
3 in the elevator control
● NFPA 13 (Installation of
Sprinkler Systems)
room when compared to
3 traditional installations
● Factory assembled
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.4
Product Selection
3
Elevator Control Elevator Control Panelboard 3
Panelboard
Ampere Rating
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical) 600 Vac Main Type Fuse Clip 1 3
Main Lug Only
400 200 — —
3
600 200 — — 3
800 200 — —
Main Fusible Switch 600 Vac 3
400 200 FDPW Class J
600 200 FDPW Class J
3
800 200 FDPB Class J
3
Branch Elevator Control Modules 2
3
Interrupting Rating
Ampere (kA Symmetrical) Breaker Type Fuse Clip 1
3
30 200 FDPB Class J
60 200 FDPB Class J 3
100 200 FDPB Class J
200 200 FDPB Class J 3
Options 3
Elevator Control Options 3
Description
3
Fused control power transformer
Fire safety interface relay 3
ON pilot light
Isolated neutral termination 3
200% isolated neutral termination
Fire alarm voltage monitoring relay (monitors shunt trip voltage)
3
NEMA Type 3R enclosure 3
Surge Protective Devices
120 kA Basic 3
Standard
Standard with surge counter
3
160 kA Basic
3
Standard
Standard with surge counter 3
200 kA Basic
Standard 3
3
250 kA Basic
Standard
3
Notes 3
1 Fuses provided by others.
2 Standard features include, fused switch with 120 Vac shunt trip, control power terminals ground termination, 3
120 Vac key test switch, 1NO and 1NC 120 Vac class mechanically interlocked auxiliary contact for hydraulic
elevators with automatic recall.
3
● Refer to Bid Manager™ drawings for your specific configuration 3
Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modifications
Contents
3 Panelboards and Lighting Controls
Description
3 Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4, Column
Modifications Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-98
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4, Column
3 Modifications Selection Guide
3 Modifications—Alphabetical Index
Available on Panelboard Types
3 Modification Item PRL1a PRL2a PRL3a PRL3E PRL4B PRL4F Column Type
3
Ambient compensating breakers 1 No No Yes No Yes — No
Bus density 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
3 Cabinets—special: Types 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Complete assembly 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
3 Compression type lugs, mains only 5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Concealed trim clamps (LT trim) 6 Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No
3 Conduit covers 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
3 Copper lugs
Copper main bus
8
9, 9a, 9b
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Standard
3 Directory frame—metal 10 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

Doors, special 11 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
3 Fungus-proof 12 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground bar 13 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
3 Electronic trip units 14 No No No Yes Yes — No
3 Ground fault protection (zero sequence)

Handle lockoff device
15
16
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Std.
No
Yes
3 Hinges, special (LT trim) 17 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Increased dimensions 18 Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No
3 Increased panel bus rating 19 Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No
3
Interiors to fit existing boxes 20 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Locks, special (LT trim) 21 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
3 Molded case switches 22 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Nameplates engraved 23 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
3
3
3
3.5
Modifications—Alphabetical Index, continued
Available on Panelboard Types
3
Modification
Neutral rated 200%
Item
24
PRL1a
Yes
PRL2a
Yes
PRL3a
Yes
PRL3E
Yes
PRL4B
Yes
PRL4F
Yes
Column Type
Yes
3
Painting and special coating 25 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3
Permanent circuit numbers 26 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Remote control switches (ASCO 920) 27 No No Yes Yes No No No 3
3
Service entrance 28 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Shunt trips 29 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Split bus or meter loop 30 No No Yes No No No No
3
Metering devices 31 No No No Yes Yes Yes No
Sub-metering, IQ Energy Sentinel 32 No No No No Yes No No 3
Sub-feed breakers 33 Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes
Sub-feed lugs 34 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No 3
3
Tamperproof screws (LT trim) 35 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Through-feed lugs 36 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Time clock space only 37 Yes Yes Yes Yes — — No
3
Touchup paint 38 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Surge protective device (SPD) 39 Yes Yes Yes Yes Ye Yes No 3
Terminals, copper only for breakers 40 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes — Yes
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1. Ambient Compensating Breakers 4. Complete Assembly

3 For ambient compensating breakers (where available) in lieu of Complete assembly of panelboard box, interior and trim prior to
standard breakers, add 10 percent to panelboard branch breaker shipment when required.
3 and to main breaker list prices, if required. (Not UL listed.)
5. Compression Main Lugs—Al/Cu Burndy Range Taking
3 2. Bus Density For other terminal types and box sizes, refer to Eaton.
Main bus ampere rating is determined by UL listed temperature
3 test. For 750A per square inch aluminum or 1000A per square inch
copper, make price addition as follows:
Modification 5—Compression Lug Data
Main Wire Range by Panel Type
3 Modification 2
Amperes PRL1a and PRL2a PRL3E PRL3a PRL4
100 (1) #1–1/0 or — — —
3 Panel Type Maximum Amperes
(1) 2/0–300 kcmil
Aluminum—750A per Square Inch 125 — (1) #4–2/0 or (1) #4–2/0 or —
3 PRL1a, 2a 100 (1) 2/0–300 kcmil (1) 2/0–300 kcmil
225 225 (1) 2/0–300 kcmil or — — —
3 400 (1) 4/0–500 kcmil
PRL3a 250 250 — (1) 2/0–350 kcmil or (1) 2/0–350 kcmil or (2) 500–750 kcmil
3 400
(1) 4/0–500 kcmil (1) 4/0–500 kcmil
400 (2) 4/0–300 kcmil or (2) 4/0–300 kcmil or (2) 4/0–300 kcmil or (2) 500–750 kcmil
PRL4 400
3 800
600
(2) 500–750 kcmil (2) 500–750 kcmil
—
(2) 500–750 kcmil
(2) 2/0–500 kcmil or (2) 2/0–500 kcmil or (2) 500–750 kcmil
Copper—1000A per Square Inch
3
(2) 500–750 kcmil (2) 500–750 kcmil
PRL1a, 2a 100 800 — — — (3) 500–750 kcmil
3 225
400
1200 — — — (4) #2–600 kcmil or
(4) 500–750 kcmil
3 PRL3a 250
600 Modification 5—Box Height Additions
3 PRL4 400
1200 Main Amperes PRL1a, PRL2a
PRL3E, PRL3a without PRL3E, PRL3a with
Neutral Neutral
3 3. Special Cabinet (Box) Construction

100 0 0X 0X
225 0 — —
3 Modification 3 250 — 2X 5X
400 0 0X 0X
3 Modification
600 — 0X 0X
Type 1 Enclosure
3 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide in place of standard 20-inch

(508.0 mm) wide PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E
Maximum size for PRL1a and PRL2a panels:
1–750 kcmil per phase, or 2–500 kcmil per phase.
For PRL4 panels, see layout pages.
3 Type 2 Enclosure
(Drip-proof with gasketed trim) PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide 6. Concealed Trim Clamps—LT Trim
3 Type 3R Enclosure
Modification 6
PRL1a, PRL2a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide
3 PRL1a, PRL2a 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide Description
PRL3a 1, PRL3E 20-inch (508 mm) wide Add per panel PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E
3 (600A maximum)
PRL3a 1, PRL3E 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide 7. Conduit Covers
3 (600A maximum)
PRL4 24-inch (609.6 mm) or 36-inch (914.4) wide only
Fabricated sheet metal to cover open conduits above and/or
below standard Type 1 box.
3 Type 12 Enclosure
Modification 7
PRL1a, PRL2a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide
3 PRL1a, PRL2a 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide Cover Type
PRL3a 1, PRL3E 20-inch (508 mm) wide Conduit Enclosing Shield (open back)
3 (600A maximum) PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E, PRL4—Refer to Eaton
PRL3a 1, PRL3E 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide Conduit Enclosure (solid back)
3 (600A maximum)
PRL4 24-inch (609.6 mm) or 36-inch (914.4) wide only
PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E, PRL4—Refer to Eaton
Note
Must also add bus density price from Modification 2 for PRL4
3 Type 4 Enclosure or Type 4X Stainless Steel Enclosure
1 At 600A, PRL3a requires the addition of density rated copper bus for Type 3R or 12 enclosure.
3 Refer to Eaton
3
3.5
8. Copper Lugs 10. Directory Frame—Metal
Optional copper mechanical main lugs only. (Includes main 3
incoming neutral lug.) Modification 10
Frame Type 3
Modification 8
3
Metal frame, plastic cover
Main Wire Range and Number
Amperes of Lugs Per Phase
3
11. Trim and Door Modifications—Special Fronts and Doors
100 (1) #14–1/0
225 (1) #6–250 kcmil Modification 11
250 (1) #6–250 kcmil Description 3
400 (2) #1/0–600 kcmil
600 (2) #1/0–600 kcmil
Door-in-door, one door over interior and one which exposes gutter. (LT Trim) (PRL1a, PRL2a,
PRL3a, PRL3E only) 3
800 (2) #1/0–600 kcmil
3
Common trim for two section panels with boxes bolted together. (LT Trim) (PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a,
1200 (3) #1/0–600 kcmil PRL3E only)
Standard flush lock with quarter turn fasteners at top and bottom of trim door (LT Trim) (standard
Modification 8—Box Height Additions on doors 48-inch (1219.2 mm) high and over). (PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a,
PRL3E only)
3
Main PRL1a, PRL3E, PRL3a PRL3E, PRL3a
Amperes PRL2a without Neutral with Neutral PRL4 To provide a trim with a lockable door for PRL4 panels (door-in-door is standard with this adder).
Includes National lock with standard keying. 1
3
100 0 0X 0X —
3
Add per panel
225 0 — — —
250 — 0X 0X 0X
400 0 0X 0X 0X
12. Fungus Proofing
For fungus proofing external portions of circuit breakers and all
3
600 — 1X 1X 0X non-metallic parts, add 10 percent of total panelboard list price.
800 — — — 0X For fungus proofing fusible switches and all non-metallic parts, 3
add 20 percent of total panelboard list price.
3
1200 — — — 0X
13. Ground Bar

9. Copper Main Bus
Modification 13
3
Modification 9
Available in PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E, PRL4, PRL1aF,
Description Bar Type
3
PRL2aF, PRL1R, PRL2R, PRL1a-LX and PRL2a-LX Panel Type
PRL1a Aluminum terminal bar for aluminum or Standard, 3
PRL2a copper cable insulated/isolated 2
9a. Silver-Plated Copper Main Bus
PRL3a
PRL3E
Copper terminal bar for copper cable only Standard,
insulated/isolated 2
3
Modification 9a PRL4
Available in PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E, PRL4, PRL1aF, Column Type 3
PRL2aF, PRL1R, PRL2R, PRL1a-LX and PRL2a-LX
3
In Pull Box Aluminum terminal bar for aluminum or Standard,
In Gutter copper cable insulated/isolated 2
9b. Tin-Plated Copper Main Bus (PRL1a, 2a, 3a, Only) Copper terminal bar for copper cable only Standard,
Modification 9b
insulated/isolated 2 3
3
Panel Type Notes
1 Extra depth box is required. Box will be 12.82-inch (325.6 mm) deep.
PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E
2 For PRL1a, 2a, 3a and Column Type panelboards. The insulated/isolated ground bar includes
a standard ground bar. 3

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
14. Electronic Trip Units 18. Increased Dimensions (PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a and PRL3E Only)
3 Type 1 Enclosure Only
Modification 14—Applies to Digitrip 310 and 310+ Trip Units
3 Description
Modification 18
Description
K-, L- and M-Frame Circuit Breaker (three-pole only)
3 Digitrip RMS310 LS
Increased End Gutters
4 inch (101.6 mm) Top or Bottom
3 Digitrip RMS310 LSI
Digitrip RMS310 LSG 1
3 Digitrip RMS310 LSIG 1

Increased Side Gutters
N-Frame circuit breaker
3 Digitrip RMS310 LS
4 inch (101.6 mm) Left or Right
7 inch (177.8 mm) Left or Right
3
Digitrip RMS310 LSI
1 12 inch (304.8 mm) Left or Right
Digitrip RMS310 LSG
3 Digitrip RMS310 LSIG 1

19. Increased Panel Main Bus Rating (Three-Phase Four-Wire,
Digiview Ammeter for 310+ Trip Unit Single-Phase Three-Wire)
3 Modification 19
15. Zero Sequence Ground Fault Protection
3 For main devices only (circuit breakers or FDPW switch) in PRL4 Main Bus
Ampere Rating Panel Type
assembled panels. Available in 250–1200A panels.
3 Price includes current monitors, ground bar, static sensor, shunt
100–225/250
225–400
trip, necessary space, mounting and connecting in panelboards.

3 Price does not include circuit breaker or FDPW switch.
600 (PRL3a)
250–400 PRL4
3 Zero sequence ground fault is available with the following family

of main devices:
400–600
600–800
3 Modification 15 800–1200
Main Device
3 JD, KD, LD, MDL, ND, LCL, LA-P, NB-P
20. Interior and Fronts to Fit Existing Boxes
FDPW switches Refer to Eaton.
3 (400–1200A)
21. Special Locks
3 16. Circuit Breaker Handle Lockoff Devices
Modification 21
3 Modification 16 Description
Breaker Types LT Type Trim

3 Non-Padlockable Yale 511S with rosette
Yale 4651S (LL803 Key)
3 BAB, QBHW, GHB, EHD, FDB, FD, ED, EDH, EDC, HQP, QPHW
JD, KD, MDL, ND Master keying—above locks or standard lock—per panelboard
3 Padlockable Corbin 15767 (Cat. #60 Key)

EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC, GHB, BAB, QBHW, HQP, QPHW, EGB, EGS, EGH
3
Tee handle and 3-point catch
JD, KD, LD, MDL, ND, FDE, HFDE PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E
COMPX metal lock with standard keying
3 17. Special Hinges—LT Trim PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E
Piano hinges in lieu of standard hinges. COMPX metal lock with GE75 keyway
3 PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E, PRL4
EZ Type Trim
3 Standard Lock, Keyed GE75
3
Standard Lock, Keyed to Corbin TEU-1
Standard Lock, Keyed to Corbin Cat 60
3 Standard Lock, Keyed to Corbin WEM1
Notes
3 1 Main breaker only.
PRL4 with door includes National lock with standard keying. See Modification 11.
3
3
3.5
22. Molded Case Switches (Three-Pole, Two-Pole) 25. Painting and Special Coatings
Standard boxes are code-gauge galvanized sheet steel. Standard 3
Modification 22 trims are code-gauge sheet steel with a rust inhibiting
Not UL Listed phosphatized coating and finished with ANSI-61. 3
Breaker Frame Maximum Volts Maximum Amperes
EHD 480 100
Modification 25 3
Description
FD 600 225
Painted boxes (ANSI-61) 3
JD 600 250
3
Painted trims or boxes (other than ANSI-61)
DK 240 400
KD 600 400 26. Permanent Circuit Numbers
LD 600 600 3
Modification 26
MDL
ND
600
600
800
1200
Description 3
3
To provide permanently attached MicartaT circuit numbers.
23. Nameplates, Engraved

3
27. Remote Control Switches—ASCO 920 (Three-Pole, Two-Pole)
Modification 23 Electrically operated, mechanically held remote control switch
directly mounted to panelboard bus for total or split bus
Type
Mastic back and installed by purchaser, per nameplate
switching applications. 3
Fixed to panel trim with two screws or rivets, per nameplate
PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E only
(For split bus applications, make price addition from
Modification 30.)
3
24. Neutral Rated 200%

480 Vac maximum short-circuit rating of panelboard is 3
22 kAIC maximum.
Modification 24 Includes complete installation in the panelboard with a screw 3
cover over the switch compartment.
Main Bus Rating
100
Neutral Rating
225 Pushbuttons or other control devices are not included.
3
225 450
For control circuit modifications, refer to Eaton.
3
250 500 Modification 27—Remote Control Switches
400 800 (PRL3a and PRL3E Only) 3
Switch Rating Amperes
3
600 1200
30, 60, 75, 100, 150, 200, 225
3
Modification 24—Box Height Additions
Main Bus Rating Neutral Rating PRL1a, PRL2a PRL3a, PRL3E PRL4 Modification 27—Remote Control Switch Modifications
100 225 0 0X — Description
3
225 450 0 — — Two-wire control relay
250 500 — 3X 0X Three-wire control relay 3

400 800 0 3X 0X Control power transformer
600 1200 — 3X 0X To provide hinged cover in place of standard screw cover 3

Note: Dimensions based on mechanical lugs. For
compression or copper lugs, refer to Eaton.
28. Service Entrance 3
To provide a Service Entrance Label as detailed under the
For 800 and 1200A PRL4 with 200% neutral, refer to Eaton. “Service Entrance Equipment” in application considerations. 3
Only panelboards meeting these requirements can be labeled as
such. The requirement for a Service Entrance Label must be 3
noted on order entry. Includes neutral disconnect link and
Service Entrance Equipment Label. (Ground bar not included—
see Modification 13.)
3
Modification 28 3
Panel Type
PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E, PRL4
3
3
3
3
29. Shunt Trip for Main or Branch Circuit Breaker and FDPW Switches 32. Sub-Metering IQ Multi-Point Submeter II (PRL4 Only)
3 For tripping device from a remote point. Voltage and frequency Microprocessor-based breaker-mounted device to monitor
must be specified. Wiring to terminal blocks is not included. power and energy (kW, kWH, kW demand). Device mounts on
3 Standard leads extend 18-inches (457.2 mm) out of device. the load side of three-pole F-, J- and K-Frame feeder breakers.
Units are shipped with the interior for field installation. Minimum
3 Factory-installed 120, 240 or 480 Vac shunt trips are available
with UL listing as shown in table below. Underwriters
box width of 36 inches (914.4 mm) is required.
Laboratories listing is not available for shunt trip mounted on Modification 32
3 molded case switches. IQ Energy Sentinel
3 Modification 29 F-Frame three-pole (150A maximum)
Device J-Frame three-pole

3 BAB, QBHW K-Frame three-pole
Requires one additional pole space, i.e., single-pole is two-pole size, two-pole is three-pole size
3 and three-pole is four-pole size. 33. Sub-Feed Breakers
GHB (three-pole only) Modification 33—Panel Types PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E.
3 All other circuit breakers One Breaker Per Panel
Interrupting Rating Box Height
FDPW switch (400–1200A)
3 Maximum
Amperes
Number
of Poles
Breaker
Type
(kA Symmetrical)
240V 480V
Addition
PRL3a
30. Split Bus or Meter Loop (250A Max.,
3 3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W, 1Ph 3W, 1Ph 2W)
100
150
2
2
EHD
FDB
18
18
14
14
NA
NA
Panel type PRL3a only. For enclosure size, refer to Eaton.
3 225
225
2
2
FD
HFD
65
100
35
65
NA
NA
Modification 30
3 Main Bus Amperes 225 2 FDC 200 100 NA
225 2 EDB 22 — NA
100–250
3 225 2 EDS 42 — NA
225 2 ED 65 — NA
31. Metering Devices (PRL4 Only)
3 IQ digital metering for incoming service. Devices are installed in
225 2 EDH 100 — NA
225 2 JD 65 35 14X
chassis mounted compartment with hinged door. Standard CTs
3 (1200A maximum) are included with devices. Requires copper 225 2 HJD 100 65 14X
bus at 1200A. 225 2 JDC 200 100 14X
3 250 2 JD 65 35 14X
Modification 31 250 2 HJD 100 65 14X
3 Device Box Height Addition 250 2 JDC 200 100 14X
IQ 130 with CTs and display 13X 400 2 DK 65 — 15X
3 IQ 130 with CTs, no display 13X 400 2 KD 65 35 15X
400 2 HKD 100 65 15X
3 IQ 140 with CTs and display 13X
400 2 KDC 200 100 15X
IQ 140 with CTs, no display 13X
100 3 EHD 18 14 NA
3 IQ 150 with CTs and display 13X 150 3 FDB 18 14 NA
3
225 3 FD 65 35 NA
IQ 210 with CTs 13X 225 3 HFD 100 65 NA
3 IQ 220 with CTs 13X 225 3 FDC 200 100 NA

225 3 EDB 22 — NA
IQ 230 with CTs 13X
3 IQ 230M with CTs 13X
225
225
3
3
EDS
ED
42
65
—
—
NA
NA
IQ 250 with CTs and display 13X
3 IQ 250 with CTs, no display 13X
225
225
3
3
EDH
JD
100
65
—
35
NA
14X
3 IQ 260 with CTs and display 13X 225

225
3
3
HJD
JDC
100
200
65
100
14X
14X
3 PXM 2250 with CTs and display 13X
250 3 JD 65 35 14X
250 3 HJD 100 65 14X
PXM 2250 with CTs, no display 13X
3 PXM 2260 with CTs and display 13X
250 3 JDC 200 100 14X
400 3 DK 65 — 15X
3 PXM 2260 with CTs, no display 13X 400 3 KD 65 35 15X
PXM 2270 with CTs and display 13X 400 3 HKD 100 65 15X
3 PXM 2270 with CTs, no display 13X 400 3 KDC 200 100 15X
3 Note: 225A maximum on Column Type panels. Sub-feed breaker not

available on PRL3a panel with subchassis.

3.5
Modification 33—Panel Type PRL3a Only. Two Breakers Per 36. Through-Feed Lugs (3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W, 1Ph 3W, 1Ph 2W)
Panel—Twin Mounted Note: 225 amperes maximum on Column Type panels. Not available on 3
Interrupting Rating service entrance panels with main lugs only (six disconnect rule).
Maximum Number Breaker (kA Symmetrical)
Box Height
Addition 3
Amperes of Poles Type 240 Volts 480 Volts PRL3a Mechanical Al/Cu lugs. Compression or copper lugs requires
225 2 JD 65 35 20X
additional price adder from Modification 5—Compression Lug
Data or Modification 8 as appropriate.
3
3
225 2 HJD 100 65 20X
Not available on panels with sub-feed breaker.
225 2 JDC 200 100 20X
250 2 JD 65 35 20X Modification 36 3
250 2 HJD 100 65 20X Main Amperes Box Height Addition
250 2 JDC 200 100 20X Panel Types PRL1a, PRL2a 3
225 3 JD 65 35 20X 100 2
225 3 HJD 100 65 20X 225 2 3

225 3 JDC 200 100 20X
3
400 2
250 3 JD 65 35 20X Panel Type PRL3a, PRL3E

250 3 HJD 100 65 20X 100 2X 3
250 3 JDC 200 100 20X 250 5X
400 8X 3
34. Sub-Feed Lugs (3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W, 1Ph 3W, 1Ph 2W)
3
600 8X
Note: Not available on service entrance panels with main lugs only (six
800 14X
disconnect rule).
Mechanical Al/Cu lugs. Compression or copper lugs requires

Panel Type PRL4 2
3
250 7X
3
additional price adder from Modification 5—Compression Lug
400 7X
Data or Modification 8 as appropriate.
600 7X
Available on main lug panels only.
800 7X 3
Modification 34
Box Height
1200 5X
3
3
Main Amperes Addition 37. Time Clock Space Only
Panel Types PRL1a, PRL2a Includes box, trim, door and mounting pan.
100–225 0X
Modification 37 3
Panel Type PRL3a, PRL3E
100–250 1X
Enclosure Type
Type 1
3
Panel Type PRL4 1
250–400 0X
PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E (24-inch (609.6 mm) space) 3
PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E (36-inch (914.4mm) space)
600 4X
Type 3R 3
35. Tamperproof Screws—LT Trim
3
PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E (24-inch (609.6 mm) space)
Modification 35
Description
38. Touchup Paint
3
Tamperproof screws for trims, in lieu of standard screws. Modification 38
Description 3
3
12 oz. spray can. ANSI-61 light gray indoor
Case Lot of 12—12 oz. spray cans. ANSI-61 light gray indoor single style
Notes
1 Refer to PRL4 layout.
3
2 Refer to panelboard sizing charts.
3
3
3
3
3
39. Surge Protective Device (SPD) 40. Copper Wire Only Terminals for Molded Case Circuit Breakers
3 Type PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL 3a and PRL3E Panelboards (To replace standard Al/Cu terminals.)
3 Package includes SPD unit connected to the panelboard bus.

Modification 40
Available for all enclosure types. Breaker Maximum Breaker Terminal Wire
3 Sizing: Frame Ampere Rating Material Range
PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3E: Add 7 inches (177.8 mm) to the standard F 225 Copper #4–4/0
3 box height. J 250 Stainless Steel #4–350
PRL3a: Add 4X for 100–200 kA SPD units. K 225 Copper (1) #3–350
3 PRL3E: AdVisor/SuperVisor display (200 kA maximum) add 8 inches. 350 Copper (1) 250–500
400 Copper (2) 3/0–250
3 SML TVSS add 7 inches.
L 600 Copper (2) 250–500
3 Type PRL4 and Elevator Control Panelboards M 600 Copper (2) #2/0–500
Package includes SPD unit and integral circuit breaker 800 Copper (3) #3/0–300
disconnect (30A) connected to the panel bus.
3 Available for all enclosure types.
N 700
1000
Copper
Copper
(2) #2/0–500
(3) #3/0–500
3 The SPD unit and integral circuit breaker disconnect will require 1200 Copper (4) #3/0–400
7X of chassis space. (Only available in 36-inches (914.4 mm) or Note
3 44-inches (1117.6 mm) wide enclosure.) 1 Requires 15A branch breaker for cable connection—three-pole (three-phase) or
two-pole (single-phase). (Add breaker separately, not included in price.)

Modification 39
3 Description kA/Phase
3 Surge Current Rating 50 80 100 120 160 200 250 300 400
SPD Package Options
3 Basic
LEDs monitor L-N, L-G, L-L and N-G
3 PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL3E ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ — — —

PRL4, Elevator Control Panelboard ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
3 Standard Feature Package
3 EMI/RFI filtering
Audible alarm with disable switch
Form C relay contact
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
3
PRL4, Elevator Control Panelboard
Standard Package
3 EMI/RFI filtering
Audible alarm with disable switch
3 Form C relay contact
Six digit LCD display
Counts surges in all modes
3 Non-volatile memory (no battery backup)
Reset button designed to prevent
accidental resets
3 PRL4, Elevator Control Panelboard ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Pow-R-Command
3.6
Contents
Pow-R-Command Family
Description Page
3
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-108 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-111
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-120 3
3
An Eaton
Green Solution
3
3
3
3
3
3
Product Overview 3
Pow-R-Command™ is a
lighting control and energy
standalone and networked
systems. Master Panelboard
the Ethernet network
connector. Both PRC1500E
lever. Controllable circuit
breakers are available in 3
management system that components include controller and PRC2000E models include 15–30A, single-pole and
integrates branch circuit
protection, control (switching
with low voltage power
supply, Breaker Control Bus
BACnet/IP for simple and
straightforward integration
two-pole configurations
and are suitable for electrical
3
and dimming) and metering (BCB) and solenoid-operated with building management distribution systems up to
into a single panelboard controllable circuit breakers. systems. All Pow-R-Command 480Y/277 Vac. Special 3
enclosure. The integrated Expansion Panelboards controllers can control up to application controllable circuit
design simplifies electrical
distribution and control
(PRCEP) are designed to
directly connect to Master
168 solenoid-operated
controllable circuit breakers by
breakers include emergency
and plug load. Emergency 3
systems design, and Panelboard via controller SLAN connecting PRCEP controllable circuit breakers
eliminates separate equipment
enclosures and associated
communications. Expansion
Panelboard includes BCB and
panelboards using the
controller SLAN sub-network
are used for controlling dual
purpose emergency lighting
3
wiring. Other benefits include
reducing equipment wall
solenoid-operated controllable
circuit breakers. Pow-R-
communications port.
Breaker Control Bus
fixtures. Plug load controllable
circuit breakers are used to 3
space, installation labor and Command systems are electronics come in 9-, 18- and meet new energy codes
total installed cost. Pow-R-
Command systems are
scalable using both Master and
Expansion Panelboards to
21-circuit lengths depending requiring 50% of receptacles
to switched ON and OFF using
3
on the size of the panelboard
designed to meet or exceed provide the right amount of schedule- or occupancy-based
ASHRAE, IECC and LEED® control with reduced
and are directly mounted to
panelboard interior rails. BCBs control systems. The two-pole 3
requirements. installed cost. are connected to the controller device includes a standard
Pow-R-Command Intelligent
Panelboards use Eaton Pow-R-
System Electronics SLAN via 4-conductor cable
and act as the interface
non-controlled and controllable
circuit breaker pole for 3
Line™ 1a and 2a lighting The 5th generation PRC “E” between controller and connecting to split
panelboard platforms to mount Series controller family controllable circuit breaker for receptacles. The common
handle tie disconnect and
3
Pow-R-Command electronics includes PRC2000E, providing status and control.
common trip mechanism
and solenoid-operated
controllable circuit breakers.
PRC1500E, PRC1000E and
PRC750E models. Specifiers
Onboard power switching
circuitry signals the allows for shared neutrals 3
Panelboard mains include and users select the controller controllable circuit breaker and meets NEC requirements.
100A to 400A main lug and
main circuit breaker
to meet specific control and
communication requirements.
solenoid to switch the
controllable circuit breaker
Accessories 3
PRC-E controllers offer a broad Pow-R-Command system
3
configurations. Available ON and OFF. Each BCB is
voltages include 120/240, range of schedule and addressable between 1 and 8, accessories include digital
208Y/120 and 480Y/277, occupant-based control. allowing the controller to switches (PRCDS) and low
single-phase and three-phase.
Panelboard options include
Network options include
RS-485 and Ethernet. PRC-E
monitor and control up to 168
voltage switches (PRCLS) to
provide local occupant override 3
installation of controllable and controllers communicate with Pow-R-Command panelboards and light level scene control.
non-controllable circuit
breakers, 200% rated neutral,
each other using powerful
Pow-R-Command peer-to-peer
are assembled with one or two
BCBs to offer the right amount
Switches are available in 2-, 4-
and 6-button configurations in
3
3
metering and surge protection protocol. All PRC-E controllers of control. white, black and almond colors.
devices (SPDs). can be programmed,
monitored and overridden Controllable Circuit Breakers Software
Pow-R-Command Intelligent
Panelboards are assembled in using the onboard Web pages
through the controller
Controllable circuit breakers
include standard circuit
Programming, monitoring and
control software includes
3
two basic configurations, Pow-
maintenance Ethernet port Lighting Optimization Software
R-Command Master and
Expansion Panelboard. using an industry standard
patch cable. The PRC2000E
protection and control.
Solenoid mechanism provides (LOS), Building Graphics 3
Pow-R-Command Master control, mechanical and Software (BGS) custom
Panelboards are designed for model includes access to
onboard Web pages through
electronic status and override graphics and Site Server
(WSS). 3
Pow-R-Command
Features
3
Pow-R-Command Master Panelboard Mounted Components
3
3
3
3
3
3
PRC-E panelboard system is controlled and Low voltage regulated power
3 monitored by microprocessor-based controller.
Onboard time clock provides schedule-based
supply provides stable power for
system electronics and reliable
control. Digital inputs are used for connecting low switching of solenoid-operated
3 voltage wallstations and occupancy sensors for
override control. Analog I/O used for dimming
and daylight harvesting control. Light level

3 sensors are connected to analog inputs. Both
fluorescent and LED lighting fixtures equipped
3 with 0–10 Vdc dimming circuitry are connected to

controller analog outputs. PRC-E controllers Breaker Control Bus (BCB)
electronics provide the control and
include backlit color LCD touchscreen and
3 Maintenance Ethernet port for local monitoring interface between
programming, system monitoring and override Pow-R-Command controllers and
control. User can access the controller solenoid-operated controllable
3 preconfigured Web pages or use Pow-R-
Command software using the controller front
circuit breakers.
3
Maintenance port. Laptop is connected to the
controller using an industry standard patch cable. Single- and multi-pole solenoid-
Network connections for RS-485 and Ethernet operated controllable circuit breakers
provide branch circuit protection and
3 provide remote connection options.
control of connected loads.
3 Standard circuit breakers can be mounted

to feed non-controlled loads.
3
3
3
3
3 Pow-R-Command Expansion Panelboard
Expansion Panelboard (PRCEP) includes Breaker Control Bus SLAN #16 AWG Four-Conductor Alpha 1064
3 electronics and solenoid-operated controllable circuit breakers.
Master and Expansion Panelboards are connected via SLAN
SLAN
communications sub-network to provide a scalable system
3 architecture for cost-effective control solutions.
SLAN
3
3
3
3
3 Expansion
(PRCEP) PRCEP
3 Master PRCEP
Maximum 150 Feet
3
Pow-R-Command
3.6
Pow-R-Command Controllers
Pow-R-Command Intelligent PRC1000E PRC1500E 3
Panelboards integrate branch
circuit protection and control Includes all the features of
the PRC750E controller with
Includes all the features of
the PRC1000E controller with
3
into a single panelboard
enclosure to eliminate the the addition of: the addition of:
3
need for mounting external ● Up to 120 controllers can ● Ethernet communications
time clocks with contactors
or relay panels. Four 5th
be connected to the same ● BACnet/IP communications 3
Pow-R-Command RS-485 protocol for integrating into
generation PRC-E series
controller models are ●
peer-to-peer network
Powerful peer-to-peer
building management
systems
3
available to allow users
and specifiers to select
protocol and network
architecture allows
● Compatible with existing
PRC2000 systems not
3
the controller that best
schedules and external
fits the application.
wiring device signals to be
requiring BACnet
communications 3
PRC750E broadcast over the network
● Microprocessor-based
to control any or all of the PRC2000E 3
solenoid-operated
Includes all the features of
programmable lighting
and energy management
controllable circuit breakers
connected to the system.
the PRC1500E controller with 3
system intended for the addition of:
standalone applications
This system capability
eliminates the need for ● Remote access to
3
● Designed with the changing the same preconfigured Web pages
electrical contractor in schedule in multiple for programming, system 3
mind, it offers integral panelboards and requiring monitoring and override
back-lit color LCD additional wiring devices to control via Ethernet 3
touchscreen display for be directly connected to network connection
simple, straightforward
commissioning and ●
specific controllers
Eight universal inputs can
● Compatible with existing 3
PRC2000 systems
3
startup be programmed to accept
● Front panelboard either digital or analog
programming can also be external wiring devices.
achieved by connecting the Compatible with low 3
controller maintenance voltage digital wiring
port to a laptop using an devices like wall stations, 3
industry standard Ethernet occupancy sensors and
patch cable photocells when
programmed as digital
3
● Preconfigured Web pages
or PC software can be
used to program, monitor
inputs. When programmed
as 0–10 Vdc analog inputs, 3
indoor and outdoor
●
and override the system
Control options include photosensors can be 3
schedule-based, occupant connected for dimming
override and photocell and daylight harvesting 3
control applications
● Sixteen two-wire low
● Eight analog 0–10 Vdc 3
voltage inputs are available outputs for connecting to
for connecting wall fluorescent and LED
lighting fixtures equipped
3
stations, occupancy
with 0–10 Vdc dimming
sensors and photocells
circuitry to meet dimming 3
● Each controller can be and daylight harvesting
connected to three
Expansion Panelboards via
application requirements 3
● Compatible with existing
SLAN communications to
control and monitor up to PRC1000 systems 3
168 solenoid-operated
circuit breakers 3
3
3
3
3
Pow-R-Command
PRC-E Controller Features

3
3
3 Controller PRC25 (MTM) PRC750E PRC1000E PRC1500E PRC2000E
3 Inputs
Dry contact inputs 6 16 8 8 8
3 Universal (dry contact or analog 0–10 Vdc)

Switch Override Controller (SOC) compatible
8
60
8
60
8
60
3 Outputs
Analog (0–10 Vdc) 8 8 8
3
Maximum number of dimming ballasts/drivers per analog output 40 40 40
Power supply for external devices (100 mA) 12 Vdc/30 Vac 12 Vdc/30 Vac 12 Vdc/30 Vac
3
Maximum number of breaker control bus 8 8 8 8
Maximum number of controllable breakers 60 168 168 168 168
Control Logic
3 Maximum number of logic control groups 6 16 100 100 100
365-day time clock ■ ■ ■ ■
3 Astronomical time clock with sunrise and sunset offsets ■ ■ ■ ■
Schedules 250 250 250 250
3 On/Off per schedule per day 250 250 250 250
Holidays 30 30 30 30
3 Automatic daylight savings time ■ ■ ■ ■
Blink notice ■ ■ ■ ■
3 Override time for switch inputs (min./max.) 1 min to 10 hrs 1 min to 10 hrs 1 min to 10 hrs 1 min to 10 hrs
Dimming and daylight harvesting ■ ■ ■
3 Configurable source logic using software (OR, AND, XOR, XNOR, NAND, LAST EVENT) 1 ■ ■ ■
Communications
3 Expansion Panelboard SLAN ■ ■ ■ ■
Digital Switch Network ■ ■ ■
3 Pow-R-Command peer-to-peer RS-485 ■ ■ ■
Maximum controllers per RS-485 network 120 120 120
3 Pow-R-Command peer-to-peer Ethernet ■ ■
Remote access to preconfigured Web pages using Ethernet network connection (TCP/IP server) ■
3 BACnet/IP ■ ■
Front Panelboard Programming
3 Front Maintenance Port (Ethernet)

4.3-inch backlit color LCD touchscreen
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
3 Access to preconfigured Web pages via maintenance port (TCP/IP)

Software
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
3 Password protection
Memory
■ ■ ■ ■
3 RAM memory for programs and configuration (MB)

Flash memory for kernel, programs and file system (MB)
128
256
128
256
128
256
128
256
3 SD card for logs and programming database (GB)

USB port for firmware upgrades, etc.
4
■
4
■
4
■
4
■
3 On-board capacitor to power clock chip during power outage (days)

Standards
10 10 10 10
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
3
UL 916 energy management equipment
California Title 24 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
3
UL 67 panelboards
CSA C22.2 #29 panelboards ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
UL 489 circuit breakers ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
3 Note
3
1 Requires software.
3
3
Pow-R-Command
3.6
Product Selection
Pow-R-Command “E” Series sensors, wallstations and
3
controllers are available in
four models and offer a range
other building control signals.
The PRC-E Controller 3
of features to meet a broad Selection Guide may be used
range of applications and to quickly identify the 3
meet energy codes. Each controller that best fits the
PRC-E controller includes a application. The PRC-E 3
backlit color LCD Controller Features table on
touchscreen, SLAN
expansion network, schedule-
the previous page provides
greater detail for the specifier
3
based controls and two-wire that may be interested in
low voltage inputs for specific controller details. 3
connecting occupancy
3
PRC-E Controller Selection Guide 12 3
Catalog
Description Number 3
Standalone operation PRC750E
RS-485 network, digital switch network, dimming and daylight PRC1000E 3
harvesting control
PRC1000E features plus Ethernet network and BACnet/IP protocol PRC1500E 3
PRC1500E features plus remote accessible preconfigured Web pages PRC2000E
3
Notes
1 PRC-E controllers are compatible and recommended for existing Pow-R-Command systems
with the same preceding model number, i.e., PRC1000 is compatible with PRC1000E.
3
2 PRC-E controllers require either LCD display or controller blank cover, catalog number
PRCEDFRTCVRD, to be installed for protecting the low voltage compartment. 3

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Pow-R-Command
Externally Mounted Controllers

3 Externally mounted converted to Pow-R-
controllers (PRCEEC) are Command Expansion
3 available for retrofit and Panelboards (PRCEP) in the
renovation projects when field by mounting Breaker
3 existing panelboards do not Control Bus (BCB) and
have required controller controllable circuit breakers
3 mounting space. Externally
mounted controllers include
directly to the interior.
Externally mounted
3 controller and control power
transformer mounted in a
controllers are connected to
the retrofitted PRCEP
NEMA 1 enclosure. Eaton panelboard using the SLAN
3 Pow-R-Line 1a and 2a lighting communications network.
panelboards can be
3
PRCE Externally Mounted Controllers
3 PRCE Externally
Mounted Controller Controller Type Connected System Voltage Catalog Number
3 PRC750E with display

PRC750E with display
120 Vac
277 Vac
PRC750EECD-120
PRC750EECD-277
3 PRC1000E without display 120 Vac PRC1000EEC-120

PRC1000E with display 120 Vac PRC1000EECD-120

3
3 PRC-E Controller Backlit Color LCD Touchscreen
PRC-E controller backlit color PRCELCD features include:
3 LCD touchscreen display
● Mounting plate and
(PRCELCD) provides the user
hardware
3 with a means for front panel
programming, status ● High image quality a-Si TFT
monitoring and override LCD module
3 control. PRCELCD is ● Resistive type touch panel
compatible with PRC-E 4.3-inch diagonal display
3
●
controllers and can be factory with 16:9 aspect

or field installed. Users can ● 16.7M colors
3 safely access the controller
low voltage compartment by
● High contrast, high
brightness
3 loosening two captive screws
located on the top corners of ● Captive screws and hinge
the display and folding the for easy access to
3 display down. controller low voltage
compartment
3
PRC-E Controller LCD PRC-E Controller LCD Touchscreen
3 Touchscreen Description Catalog Number
PRCE backlit LCD touchscreen with mounting plate PRCELCD
3
3
3
3
Pow-R-Command
3.6
Breaker Control Bus
Breaker Control Bus (BCB) of DIP switches to configure
3
provides the electronic the device SLAN address
interface and power between 1 and 8. BCBs 3
switching signal between the are connected to the PRC-E
controller and solenoid- controller using PRC-to-BCB 3
operated controllable circuit and BCB-to-BCB SLAN cables
breaker. BCB comes in three
lengths to fit standard lighting
in a daisy-chain network
architecture. RUN, SLAN
3
panelboards and is mounted
to the panelboard interior
and PWR LEDs indicate
BCB operating status. 3
rails. Each BCB has a set
3
Breaker Control Bus (BCB)
Breaker Control Bus
(BCB) Controlled Catalog
3
Description Circuits Number
9-circuit Breaker Control Bus 9 PRC1000BCB-9
3
3
3
3
3
3
Controller and Breaker Control Bus SLAN Cables
Controller and BCB SLAN #16 AWG wire. One pair of
3
cables are used for wires used for 30 Vac power
connecting controllers to with the second pair used to 3
associated BCBs. Each cable transmit and receive
type is made in three lengths communications with 3
using Alpha 1064 4-conductor connected controller.
3
Controller and Breaker Controller and Breaker Control Bus
Control Bus SLAN
Cables
SLAN Cables 3
Catalog
Description Number
3
Controller-to-BCB / 42-circuit PRCSLAN42
Controller-to-BCB / 30-circuit PRCSLAN30 3
Controller-to-BCB / 18-circuit PRCSLAN18
Controller-to-BCB / 42-circuit with right BCB only PRCSLAN42R 3
Controller-to-BCB / 30-circuit with right BCB only
Controller-to-BCB / 18-circuit with right BCB only
PRCSLAN30R
PRCSLAN18R
3
BCB-to-BCB / 42-circuit PRCSLAN42B 3
BCB-to-BCB / 30-circuit PRCSLAN30B
BCB-to-BCB / 18-circuit PRCSLAN18B 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Pow-R-Command
Auxiliary Power Supply

3 Auxiliary Power Supply with the second pair used for
(PRCPS) is used to boost controller to BCB RS-485
3 power on the SLAN. Master communications. The PRCPS
and Expansion Panelboards can be used to power a single
3 communicate over the SLAN Expansion Panelboard or
via Alpha 1064 4-conductor extend the SLAN an
3 #16 AWG cable. Recommended
maximum SLAN length is 150
additional 150 ft. The SLAN
can be extended up to 4,000
3 ft. One pair of wires provides
power to BCB for switching
ft by using a PRCPS in each
PRCEP.
3
Auxiliary Power Supply
3 Auxiliary Power
Supply Description Catalog Number
3 PRC power supply 96 VA with 120/277 Vac input and

30 Vac output voltage
PRCPS
3
3
Controllable Circuit Breakers
3
3 GHQRD 1
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
3
Vac (50/60 Hz)
Number of Poles Ampere Rating 120 120/240 277 277/480 Catalog Number
3 Single-Pole 1 15 65,000 65,000 14,000 — GHQRD1015

20 65,000 65,000 14,000 — GHQRD1020
3 30 65,000 65,000 14,000 — GHQRD1030
3
3
3
Two-Pole 2 15 65,000 65,000 ---- 14,000 GHQRD2015
3 20 65,000 65,000 ---- 14,000 GHQRD2020
30 65,000 65,000 ---- 14,000 GHQRD2030
3
3
3
3
Note
3 1 Not recommended for existing PRC25, PRC100, PRC750, PRC1000 and PRC2000 systems. GHQRSP controllable circuit breakers are compatible with these systems.
3
3
3
3
3
3
Pow-R-Command
3.6
GHQRSP 1
3
Vac (50/60 Hz)
Number of Poles Ampere Rating 120 120/240 277 277/480 Catalog Number 3
3
Single-Pole 1 15 65,000 65,000 14,000 — GHQRSP1015
20 65,000 65,000 14,000 — GHQRSP1020
30 65,000 65,000 14,000 — GHQRSP1030
3
3
3
3
Two-Pole 2 15 65,000 65,000 — 14,000 GHQRSP2015 3
3
20 65,000 65,000 — 14,000 GHQRSP2020
30 65,000 65,000 — 14,000 GHQRSP2030
3
3
3
3
BABRSP 2 3
Vac (50/60 Hz) 3
Number of Poles Ampere Rating 120 120/240 Catalog Number
Single-Pole 1 15 10,000 — BABRSP1015 3
3
20 10,000 — BABRSP1020
30 10,000 — BABRSP1030
3
3
3
3
Two-Pole 2 15 — 10,000 BABRSP2015
20 — 10,000 BABRSP2020
30 — 10,000 BABRSP2030
3
40 — 10,000 BABRSP2040
50 — 10,000 BABRSP2050 3
3
Notes 3
1 Compatible with existing PRC25, PRC100, PRC750(E), PRC1000(E), PRC1500(E) and PRC2000(E) systems. Recommend using GHQRD controllable
circuit breakers for PRC-E systems.

2 Compatible with PRC25, PRC100, PRC750(E), PRC1000(E), PRC1500(E) and PRC2000(E) systems. Recommend using BABRP controllable
3
circuit breakers for PRC25 systems.
3
3
3
3
Pow-R-Command
BABRP 1
3 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
Vac (50/60 Hz)
3 Number of Poles Ampere Rating 120 120/240 Catalog Number
3 Single-Pole 1 15
20
10,000
10,000
----
----
BABRP1015
BABRP1020
3 30 10,000 ---- BABRP1030
3
3
3 Two-Pole 2 15 ---- 10,000 BABRP2015
3 20 ---- 10,000 BABRP2020

30 ---- 10,000 BABRP2030
3 40 ---- 10,000 BABRP2040
3
3
3 Emergency Circuit Breaker
The GHQRDEL and switched circuit for
3 GHQRSPEL controllable controlling lighting and
circuit breakers are designed standard non-switched circuit
3 to meet NEC 700.12(F) for to provide power to the unit
sources of power in unit emergency charging and
3 equipment used for
emergency lighting
detection circuitry. Controllable
circuit breaker includes a
3 applications. The controllable
circuit breaker includes both
common handle tie and a
common trip mechanism.
3
Emergency Circuit GHQRD Emergency Circuit Breaker 2
3 Breaker Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
Vac (50/60 Hz)
3 Number of Poles Ampere Rating 277 277/480 Catalog Number
2 15 14,000 — GHQRDEL2015
3 20 14,000 — GHQRDEL2020
3
3
3 Emergency Circuit GHQRSP Emergency Circuit Breaker 3
Breaker
3
Vac (50/60 Hz)
Number of Poles Ampere Rating 277 277/480 Catalog Number
3 2 15 14,000 — GHQRSPEL2015
3 20 14,000 — GHQRSPEL2020
3
3 Notes
1 Not compatible with PRC750(E), PRC1000(E), PRC1500(E) and PRC2000(E) systems.
3
2 Compatible with PRC750E, PRC1000E, PRC1500E and PRC2000E systems. Not recommended for existing PRC100,
PRC750, PRC1000 and PRC2000 systems. GHQRSPEL controllable circuit breakers are compatible with these systems.
3 Compatible with PRC750(E), PRC1000(E), PRC1500(E) and PRC2000(E) systems. Not recommended for existing PRC100,
3 PRC750, PRC1000 and PRC2000 systems. GHQRSP controllable circuit breakers are compatible with these systems.

Pow-R-Command
3.6
Pow-R-Command Switches
3
Digital Switches Digital Switches 12
3
Front View
Pow-R-Command Digital Color Number of Buttons Catalog Number
Switches (PRCDS) are used
3
Black 2 PRCDS2B
for occupant override and
light level control. PRCDS 4 PRCDS4B
include digital and analog I/O
and 12 Vdc external power
6 PRCDS6B
3
White 2 PRCDS2W
source for connecting field
wiring devices. The 12 Vdc Back View 4 PRCDS4W 3
external power source is 6 PRCDS6W
used to power an occupancy
Almond 2 PRCDS2A 3
sensor and digital input for
monitoring occupancy status.
Analog input is used to
4
6
PRCDS4A
PRCDS6A
3
connect a light level sensor
analog output for controlling
Ivory 2 PRCDS2V 3
up to 30 fluorescent ballasts 4 PRCDS4V
or LED drivers. Digital 6 PRCDS6V 3
switches are connected to Six-Button
controllers’ Digital Switch
Network (DSN) via CAT6
3
cable with 23 AWG wire
using standard RJ45
3
connectors. Each controller
DSN supports connecting up 3
to 99 digital switches.
Onboard rotary switches 3
allow addresses to be set in
the field. LED backlit buttons
provide real-time breakers
Six-Button Engraved
3
and/or groups status. Each
digital switch can have a title 3
description using up to 16
characters. Pushbutton 3
labels can have up to four
characters. Standard font 3
type is Helvetica regular bold.
Notes
1 Not compatible with PRC750(E) controllers. Recommended for PRC1000(E), PRC1500(E) and PRC2000(E) controllers.
3
3
2 Contact factory for custom labeling.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Pow-R-Command
Digital Switch I/O Configuration

3 Analog Input Digital Input Analog Output 12 Vdc Output
Pushbutton Configuration 0–10 Vdc 0–10 Vdc 0–10 Vdc 20 mA Maximum
3 Two-button ■ ■ ■ ■
3 Four-button ■ ■ ■ ■
Six-button ■ — ■ ■
3
3 Digital Switch Network Power Injector
Digital Switch Network DSN before every 16th
3 Power Injector (PRCDSNPI) is
used to provide 24 Vac power
PRCDS or before the total
length of DSN reaches 500 ft
on the DSN. A PRCDSNPI (whichever comes first).
3 should be installed on the
3 Digital Switch Digital Switch Network Power Injector

Network Power Description Catalog Number
3 Injector
Digital Switch Network Power Injector PRCDSNPI
3
3
3
3 Low Voltage Switch
3 Pow-R-Command Low
Voltage Switch (PRCLS)
inputs. Each PRCLS can have
a title description using up to
includes momentary dry- 16 characters. Pushbutton
3 contact pushbuttons used for labels can have up to four
inputs into the controller. characters. Standard font
3 PRCLS directly connect to type is Helvetica regular bold.
controller digital and universal
3
Low Voltage Switch Low Voltage Switch 1
3 Color Number of Buttons Catalog Number
Black 2 PRCLS2B
3 4 PRCLS4B
3 6 PRCLS6B
White 2 PRCLS2W
3 4 PRCLS4W
6 PRCLS6W
3 Termination Board Almond 2 PRCLS2A
3
4 PRCLS4A
6 PRCLS6A
3 Ivory 2 PRCLS2V
4 PRCLS4V
3 6 PRCLS6V
3
3 Note
1 Consult factory for custom labeling.
3
3
3
Pow-R-Command
3.6
Switch Wallplates
Fits rocker-style Decorator, 3
Decora style switches.
Screwless design is available 3
in black, white, almond and
ivory for 1-, 2- and 3-switch 3
designs.
3
Switch Wallplates Switch Wallplates
Color Number of Switches Catalog Number 3
Black 1 PRCSWP1B
2 PRCSWP2B 3
3 PRCSWP3B
White 1 PRCSWP1W 3
3
2 PRCSWP2W
3 PRCSWP3W
Almond 1
2
PRCSWP1A
PRCSWP2A
3
Ivory
3
1
PRCSWP3A
PRCSWP1V
3
2
3
PRCSWP2V
PRCSWP3V
3
3
Pow-R-Command Switch Override Controller
The Pow-R-Command Switch All digital and analog I/O is ● Sixteen low voltage two- 3
Override Controller (PRCSOC) connected using #18 AWG wire 24 Vdc outputs to
can be used to connect digital with maximum of 500 ft power status LEDs; 3
and analog I/O to Pow-R- length. The PRCSOC features optional to add 32 low
Command systems. This include: voltage two-wire 24 Vdc 3
device is recommended outputs to power status
Sixty low voltage two-wire
3
●
when controller onboard LEDs
digital and analog I/O has switch inputs for
connecting wall stations,
● External 15 Vdc power
been exceeded or when
there is an advantage to occupancy sensors and source for powering
occupancy and light level
3
connecting remote I/O via a control relay outputs from
network connection. The building management
systems
sensors and PRC auxiliary
devices 3
PRCSOC is supplied with the Connects to Pow-R-
3
●
controller, termination board ● Eight low voltage two-wire
universal (digital or analog) Command RS-485 network
in a NEMA 1 enclosure. Dual
● Communicates to the
voltage 120/277 Vac power
supply and 32-status LED
inputs. Analog field devices
like light level sensors with system using Pow-R- 3
output card are optional. 0–5 Vdc outputs can be Command peer-to-peer
connected for dimming protocol 3
The PRCSOC is connected and daylight harvesting ● Configured by using
to the Pow-R-Command
system via the RS-485
applications Pow-R-Command Lighting 3
● Three low voltage 0–10 Optimization Software
network. Status and
command signals are sent to
Vdc analog outputs for ● Provided in a NEMA 1 3
controlling fluorescent and enclosure
the system using Pow-R-
Command peer-to-peer
LED light fixtures equipped
dimming circuitry;
● Not compatible with
PRC750(E) controllers
3
protocol. The PRCSOC is maximum of 40 each per
configured using Pow-R- output with optional 3
Command Lighting dimmer cables
Optimization Software.
3
Pow-R-Command Switch Override Controller
3
Pow-R-Command
Switch Override
Controller
Description Catalog Number
3
PRC Switch Override Controller without power supply mounted in NEMA 1 enclosure PRCSOCC
PRC Switch Override Controller w/ 120/277 Vac power supply mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure PRCSOCEC 3
3
PRC Switch Override Controller w/ 120/277 Vac power supply, pilot output card mounted in a PRCSOCECO
NEMA 1 enclosure

Pow-R-Command
Accessories
3
Ethernet Interface Module
3 Ethernet Interface Module PRCEIM can be used as the The PRCEIM comes in a table
(PRCEIM) is used for master scheduler and top enclosure and should be
3 connecting a Pow-R-
Command system when
includes 250 unique
schedules. The PRCEIM can
physically located near an
Ethernet hub or repeater, but
3 configured in an RS-485
daisy-chain network to a
be programmed to sync
controller time clocks. This
the PC can be located
anywhere on the Ethernet
user’s existing Ethernet device is connected to the network. The PRCEIM will
3 network. The PRCEIM allows Ethernet network using communicate at 10Base-T
access to the system using standard CAT5 cable. The and must have a fixed IP
3 Pow-R-Command software three-pin connector is used to address assignment on the
package over the facility directly connect to the Pow- Ethernet network.
3 Ethernet network. R-Command RS-485
controller network.
3
3 Ethernet Interface
Module
Ethernet Interface Module 1
3 PRC Ethernet Interface Module mounted in table top enclosure PRCEIM
3
3
Network Interface Box
3 Network Interface Box includes 250 unique direct connection to a
(PRCNIB) is used for directly schedules. The PRCNIB is computer. The Pow-R-
3 connecting a Pow-R-
Command system when
programmed to sync the time
clocks of all controllers
Command controller RS-485
network is connected to the
3 configured in an RS-485
daisy-chain network
connected to the RS-485
network. The user’s
PRCNIB 3-pin connector. The
PRCNIB comes in a table top
architecture to the user’s computer is connected using enclosure and should be
3 desktop or laptop computer. the RS-232 communications mounted within 25 ft of
PRCNIB can be used as the connector and the RS-232 to the computer.
3 master scheduler and USB converter cable for
3
Network Interface Box Network Interface Box 1
3 Description Catalog Number
PRC Network Interface Box mounted in table top enclosure PRCNIB
3
3
Note
1 Not compatible with PRC750(E) controllers. Recommended for PRC100, PRC1000(E), PRC1500(E) and
PRC2000(E) controllers.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Pow-R-Command
3.6
BACnet Interface Module
Pow-R-Command BACnet 50 points. These points includes two network
3
Interface Module (PRCBIM-1) include status and control of connections. The RS-485
is designed for simple individual controllable circuit connection is used for 3
BACnet integration without breakers and groups of connecting the Pow-R-
the need for extensive controllable circuit breakers. Command RS-485 network 3
BACnet knowledge. The Input status is also included while the Ethernet 10Base-T
device maps Pow-R-
Command controller points to
in the points map.
Programming the device is
connection is used for
connecting to the facility
3
BACnet/IP points of any
RS-485 network connected
accomplished by using Pow-
R-Command Lighting
Ethernet network. The device
requires a fixed IP address 3
Pow-R-Command controller. Optimization Software to be configured before
The PRCBIM-1 can map up to (PRCLOS). The PRCBIM-1 connecting to the network. 3
3
BACnet Interface BACnet Interface Module 1
Module Description Catalog Number 3
3
PRC BACnet Interface Module PRCBIM-1
3
3
BACnet Shadow Server 3
Pow-R-Command BACnet breakers and groups of connecting to the facility
Shadow Server (PRCSS) is
designed for simple BACnet
Input status is also included
Ethernet network.
The PRCBIM-1 includes two
3
integration without the need
for extensive BACnet
in the points map.
Programming the device is
network connections. The
RS-485 connection is used for 3
knowledge. The PRCSS maps accomplished by using Pow- connecting the RS-485
Pow-R-Command controller R-Command Lighting network while the Ethernet 3
points to BACnet/IP points. Optimization Software 10Base-T connection is used
Up to 120 devices can be (PRCLOS). The PRCSS for connecting to the facility 3
connected to a system. Each includes two network Ethernet network. The device
PRCSS has full access to all
150 points of the directly
connections. The RS-485
connection is used for
requires a fixed IP address
to be configured before
3
connected Pow-R-Command
controller. These points
connecting the Pow-R-
Command RS-485 network
connecting to the network.
Device power is supplied by 3
include status and control of while the Ethernet 10Base-T controller 12 Vdc external
individual controllable circuit connection is used for power source. 3
3
BACnet Shadow BACnet Shadow Server 1
Server Description Catalog Number 3
3
PRC BACnet Shadow Server PRCSS
3
Note
3
3
1 Not compatible with PRC750(E) controllers. Recommended for PRC100, PRC1000(E) and PRC1500(E) controllers
RS-485 network.
3
3
3
3
3
Pow-R-Command
Universal Ethernet Interface

3 The Pow-R-Command facility’s Ethernet network via Command devices on each
Universal Ethernet Interface TCP protocol. The PRC5000 RS-485 network. The device
3 (PRCUEI) is used can connect up to 16 Pow-R- power is supplied by the
in conjunction with the Command RS-485 networks controller 12 Vdc external
3 PRC5000 Advanced Lighting using a PRCUEI to connect power connection.
Controller to connect multiple each network. The PRCUEI
3 RS-485 networks using the supports up to 120 Pow-R-
3 Universal Ethernet
Interface
Universal Ethernet Interface 1
3 PRC Universal Ethernet Interface PRCUEI
3
3
3
Universal Ethernet Router
3 Universal Ethernet Router LAN transparently across The RS-485 connection is
PRCUER is intended for Ethernet segments within used for connecting the Pow-
3 facilities where an Ethernet the same subnet, allowing R-Command RS-485 network
network is already installed. segments of the controller while the Ethernet 10Base-T
3 The PRCUER extends the
network to be physically connection is used for
separated from each other connecting to the facility
Pow-R-Command controller
3 network by tunneling Pow-R-
within a facility. Programming
the device is accomplished by
Ethernet network.
The device can be configured
Command controller LAN using Pow-R-Command for DHCP or be assigned a
3 control packets over existing Lighting Optimization static IP address. Device
Ethernet network using UDP Software (PRCLOS). power is supplied by
3 Ethernet protocol. PRCUER
devices extend the controller
The PRCUER includes controller 12 Vdc external
two network connections. power source.
3
Universal Ethernet Universal Ethernet Router 1
3 Router Description Catalog Number
PRC Universal Ethernet Router PRCUER
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Pow-R-Command
3.6
PRC5000 Building Automation Controller
Pow-R-Command 5000 Custom equipment The PRC5000 controller is
3
(PRC5000) is a performance and energy commonly used to serve
microprocessor-based usage reports can be facility custom graphics via 3
lighting control and energy configured and automatically Web pages. Authorized users
management controller. It is sent to the facility manager can log into the device using 3
capable of communicating via email notification. These a standard Web browser for
with other Pow-R-Command
system devices for providing
reports may be used to
measure and verify that
viewing the custom graphics.
System schedule changes
3
advanced control strategies
including master schedules
equipment is performing as
designed and delivering
and override controls can be
made at the click of a button. 3
and demand response. expected energy savings.
3
PRC5000E PRC5000 Building Automation Controller 3
3
PRC5000 Building Automation Controller PRC5000E
PRC5000 Building Automation Controller with modem PRC5000EM 3
3
3
3
PRC25 Controller
The PRC25 panelboard is a The PRC25 controller has the distributed across a printed 3
flexible and cost-effective ability to accept either four or circuit board for connecting
lighting and load control
system that integrates branch
six control inputs (MTM-4 and
MTM-6 models). Each control
the controllable circuit 3
breakers. Each GBT may have
circuit and control in a single
enclosure. The PRC25 stand-
input is used to control a
discreet group of controllable
up to seven controllable
circuit breakers connected. A
3
alone panelboard may be circuit breakers. The maximum of three GTBs may
controlled by external time controller inputs can be be mounted on each side of 3
clocks, photocell, wall switch configured in both maintained the panelboard. All
or signal from another dry or wet contacts. controllable breakers 3
building control system. connected to the GTB will be
There is no field programming
and comes from the factory
The PRC25 MTM controller
board is connected to
controlled as a group.
Multiple GTBs can be
3
wired to meet the
specification. using a Group Termination
connected together using a
factory-supplied jumper to 3
Board (GTB). Each GTB increase the size of control
consists of nine connectors groups. 3
3
PRC25 Controller
3
PRC25
3
PRC25 4-channel controller MTM-4
PRC25 6-channel controller MTM-6
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Pow-R-Command
Lighting Optimization
3 Software
3 Lighting Optimization
Software (PRCLOS) is
recommended for Pow-R-
3 Command system users. It is
compatible with PRC100,
3 PRC750(E)1, PRC1000(E),
PC1500(E) and PRC2000(E)
3 systems. PRCLOS
controllers only through the
front Maintenance port using
3 a PRCSmartCable. allows
users to set up, program and
3 monitor their system. This
basic software package is
3 capable of recognizing and
saving databases for a
3 single site.
3
3
3
3 Lighting Optimization Software 1
3 PRC Lighting Optimization Software PRCLOS
3
3
Building Graphics Software
3 Building Graphics Software
(PRCBGS) is a fully
3 interactive object oriented
graphics interface for
3 controlling and monitoring
Pow-R-Command lighting
3 control and energy
management systems. The
integrator can create and
3 depict objects such as light
fixtures, switches,
3 occupancy sensors, light
sensors, floor plans, etc.
3 PRCBGS provides server
graphic Web pages over local
3 Ethernet connection to any
computer using a standard
Internet browser. PRCBGS
3 requires the installation of PC
Building Graphics Software
Central (PRCPCC01/ Description Catalog Number
3 PRCPCC10). PRC Building Graphics Software PRCBGS
3 Note
1 Remote network connection not available. Requires direct connection to controller
Maintenance port. PRC750 connection requires PRCSmartCable. PRC750E connection

3 requires industry standard patch cable.
3
3
Pow-R-Command
3.6
PC Central Software
PC Central Software users to set up, program and PC Central Software
3
(PRCPCC) is recommended monitor their system with the
for field technicians added features of advanced
3
responsible for maintaining diagnostics and programming PC Central Software (single site) PRCPCC01
Pow-R-Command systems. It capabilities. This advanced PC Central Software (10 sites) PRCPCC10 3
is compatible with PRC100, software package is capable
PRC750 (E)1, PRC1000(E),
PC1500(E) and PRC2000(E)
of recognizing and saving
databases for single or
3
systems. PRCPCC allows multiple sites.
3
Site Server Software 3
Pow-R-Command Site Server Any computer on the network Site Server Software
(PRCSSS) integrates the PC with PRCSSS can access real- Description Catalog Number 3
Central suite of management time dynamically refreshed
tools with the Internet or
Intranet. The users have real-
data using a browser PRC Site Server Software PRCSSS
3
implementing appropriate
time global access to the
Pow-R-Command systems
Web standards (Netscape
Navigator or Internet
3
through the Internet. PRCSSS Explorer). Special software
allows multiple users access other than the browser is not 3
to historical data, device required. PC Central is
status and control, and required to run this 3
graphical display interfaces. application software.
3
Desktop Computer
3
Recommended Minimum Computer Specifications
Although it is difficult to Lighting Optimization Desktop Computer 3
guarantee compatibility with Software and PC Central Description Catalog Number
all PC-compatible equipment, Software is compatible with PRC desktop computer PRCDesktop 3
the basic installation is the following operating
generally compatible with
the following minimum
systems: PRC Laptop Computer PRCLaptop
3
● Windows 98 Second
specifications:
Edition 3
● Microsoft® Windows® ● Windows 2000
operating system Professional 3
● 1GHz processor or better ● Windows 2000 Server
● At least 40 MB of unused ● Windows 2003 Server 3
RAM ● Windows XP Home Edition
● Hard drive with at least ● Windows XP Professional 3
100 MB of free space plus Edition
50 MB for each site to be
managed
● Windows Vista 3
(all versions)
● Ethernet network adapter
● Windows 7 3
● 800 x 600 monitor
● CD-ROM drive 3
Smart Cable Programming Tool 3
Smart Cable Programming Tool
Pow-R-Command Smart Cable
(PRCSmartCable) is used for
PRC2000 controllers. The
PRCSmartCable connects Description Catalog Number
3
front panelboard the local laptop USB port to
programming PRC100, controller maintenance port.
PRC smart cable PRCSmartCable
3
PRC750, PRC1000 and Note
1 Remote network connection not available. Requires direct connection to controller
3
maintenance port. PRC750 connection requires PRCSmartCable. PRC750E connection
requires industry standard patch cable.
3
3
3
Metering Service Sections
Contents
3 Metering Service Section
Description Page
3 Metering Service Sections
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-127
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-128
3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T3-128
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 Product Description Application Description Standards and
Certifications
3 ●
●
600 Vac maximum
● For use in areas where the
disconnect and current ● UL 67, UL 50
transformer combination is
3 three-phase three-wire,
single-phase three-wire. required by utilities
● NEC
● Suitable for use as Service
3 Service entrance panel
●
combining a main Entrance Equipment

disconnect with a power ● Top or bottom entrance
3 company metering ● Hot or cold sequence
compartment metering
3 ● Circuit breaker or fusible ● The current transformer
switch disconnect compartment will
3 ● 400–1200A ratings accommodate the following
● Provision for power 12-inch (304.8 mm) bar-type
3 company metering: CTs:
● Hinged sealable door
3 over CT section Bar-Type CTs
● Arranged for bar-type, General
3 200–1200A utility- ABB Electric Sangamo Astra
furnished CTs CTB JCT-10 R6B TAB, TA
3 ● Barriered CT
compartment
CSF JCM-0 R6BA TCB, AA
CMF JCW-0 R6M AB
3 ● Factory assembled CBH JAK-0
● Wallmounted enclosure
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.7
Catalog Number Selection
3
Panelboard Catalog Number Selection Guide 1 3
WBM DK 2 4 A 3
Panel Type Bus Bar Type 3
WSM = Fusible switch Device Type Ampere Rating A = Aluminum
WBM = Circuit breaker FDPW = Fusible switch
Circuit breaker = (See table below)
Service and Voltage 4 = 400A
6 = 600A
C = Copper 3
2 = Single-phase three-wire
3
3 = Three-phase three-wire 8 = 800A
4 = Three-phase four-wire 12 = 1200A
Example: WBMDK24A 3
WBM = Circuit breaker type, DK = Circuit breaker type from table below, 2 = Single-phase three-wire,
4 = 400A, A = Aluminum bus bar.
3
3
Product Selection 3
Metering Service
Section
Type WBM Circuit Breaker Sections 3
Max. Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical)
Ampere
Rating 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Breaker Type 23
Base
Catalog Number 4 3
400 65 — — DK WBMDK
3
400 65 35 25 KD WBMKD
400 100 65 35 HKD WBMHKD 3
400 200 100 50 KDC WBMKDC
400 200 200 — LCL WBMLCL 3
3
600 65 35 25 LD WBMLD
600 100 65 35 HLD WBMHLD
600 200 100 50 LDC WBMLDC
3
800 65 50 25 MDL WBMMDL
800 100 65 35 HMDL WBMHMDL 3
800 65 50 25 ND WBMND800
800 100 65 35 HND WBMHND800 3
1200
1200
65
65
50
50
25
25
ND
NDG 5
WBMND1200
WBMNDG1200
3
1200 100 65 35 HND WBMHND1200 3
1200 100 65 35 HNDG 5 WBMHNDG1200
Notes 3
1 Refer to Hartford Satellite Plant.
2 For other breaker types, refer to Hartford Satellite Plant. 3
3 In cold sequence metering only, a 10X or 18X feeder breaker section can be supplied
downstream from the CT compartment. Refer to Hartford Satellite Plant.

4 Complete catalog number according to Catalog the Number Selection Guide—table above.
3
3
5 Integral ground fault.
3
3
3
3
3

3
3
WSM Fusible Switch Sections FDPW Switch Ratings, 250 or 600 Vac
Interrupting Base Ampere Fuse Class Short-Circuit
3
Ampere Rating Fusible Catalog Rating Used 1 Ratings (kA Sym.)
Rating (kA Symmetrical) Switch 1 Number 2
400, 600 R 200
240 Vac Fusible Devices 3
3 400 Refer to table on right FDPW WSMFDPW
400, 600 J 4 200
(FDPW Switch Ratings, 250 or 800, 1200 L 200

3 600
600 Vac)
FDPW WSMFDPW
800 FDPW WSMFDPW
3 1200 FDPW WSMFDPW Dimensions

600 Vac Fusible Devices 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3 400 Refer to table on right FDPW WSMFDPW Note: Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
(FDPW Switch Ratings, 250 or
3
600 FDPW WSMFDPW
600 Vac)
800 FDPW WSMFDPW Type 1 Enclosure—Metering Service Section
3 1200 FDPW WSMFDPW
3
Modifications
3
Modifications for WBM Metering Service Sections
3 Description
Copper bus
3 Circuit breaker shunt trip installed
H
3 Circuit breaker undervoltage release installed
Type 3R outdoor enclosure
3 Provisions for PTs
3
Modifications for WSM Metering Service Sections
3 Description
Copper bus
3 Shunt trip installed
3 W D
Type 3R outdoor enclosure
Provisions for PTs
3 FDPW fusible switch ground fault system

Includes zero sequence current monitor, static sensor, shunt trip Type 1 Enclosure
and fused control power transformer
3 Panelboard Ampere Enclosure Dimensions Box Catalog
Type Rating Height Width Depth Number
3 WBM,
Circuit breaker
400–1200 73.50 (1866.9) 36.00 (914.4) 11.31 (287.0) BX3673
3 WSM,
Fusible
400–1200 90.50 (2286.0) 36.00 (914.4) 11.31 (287.0) BX3690
3 Notes
1 Fuses are not included.
3
2 Complete catalog number according to Catalog Number Selection Guide—
Page V2-T3-127.
3 Class J Fuse provisions are applicable only to 600V units. When required, use price
3 and dimensions of 600V units for all voltages 600 and below.
4 Class J Fuse provisions are applicable only to 600V units. When required, use price and
dimensions of 600V units for all voltages 600 and below.

3
3
3
3
Pow-R-Stock Plus Program
3.8
Pow-R-Stock Plus
3
Product Description Factory-Assembled Color-Coded Package Labels
Offering two options to meet Panelboard Option The box, interior and trim 3
the demanding schedule The Pow-R-Stock Plus factory- packaging are clearly
requirements of today's
customers.
assembled panelboard option identified with brightly
colored labels (a different
3
offers key advantages over
programs that offer only
unassembled panelboards.
color for each box size). This
facilitates stocking, filling 3
orders, and matching
Reduced Installation Time components in the field. 3
Unassembled panelboards
must be assembled at the job
Contact your local Eaton
distributor for more details 3
site before the true on the Pow-R-Stock Plus
installation process can unassembled panelboard 3
begin, adding time and labor option.
cost to the process. Pow-R-
Stock Plus assembled
3
Eaton Distributors
panelboards are ready to
install the moment they arrive Pow-R-Stock Plus Program Includes
Contact your Eaton sales 3
office or local satellite
at the job site. the EZ Trim and EZ Box
Unassembled
manager and arrange to
review the program details
3
Reduced On-Site
and criteria for qualification
Material Handling Panelboard Option
as a Pow-R-Stock Plus 3
A typical 42-circuit distributor.
Type PRL1a Panelboard unassembled panelboard has
a minimum of 46 parts to
3
● Factory-assembled
panelboards available from
your local satellite plant in
receive and handle, taking up
valuable time at the job site. 3
A Pow-R-Stock Plus
●
24 to 72 hours
Unassembled panelboards
assembled panelboard is just 3
one item to receive and
in stock at authorized Pow-
R-Stock Plus distributors
handle (two if the box is
shipped ahead).
3
The Product Offering
Factory Warranty 3
Pow-R-Stock Plus panels,
available either as factory-
assembled or as
Field assembly of
unassembled panelboards 3
Pow-R-Line 1a and 2a Panelboards are
adds to contractor warranty
unassembled from distributor
stock, are based on the most responsibility. Pow-R-Stock
Designed to Provide Application
Flexibility with Off-the-Shelf Service 3
frequently ordered Plus assembled panelboards The Pow-R-Stock Plus
panelboards, including: carry a full factory warranty. unassembled panelboard 3
interior is designed
● 120/240V, 208Y/120V and
480Y/277V ratings
Simplicity
Order your Pow-R-Stock Plus
specifically for distributor 3
stock and field assembly.
●
●
100–400A mains
Single- and three-phase
Panelboard by description
and it will arrive at the job site
Its modular design allows
for easy configuration in
3
complete. No need to worry
● Surface and flush mounted
about matching catalog
the field.
3
● Aluminum or copper bus number kits at the job site or Top or bottom incoming,
● Type 1 or Type 3R chasing after miscellaneous main lugs or main breaker...all 3
enclosures parts and pieces. with the same Pow-R-Stock
● Service entrance available
Contact your local satellite
Plus unassembled interior.
Lug and breaker kits provide
3
● Options for 200% neutrals plant (see next page for a greater flexibility with fewer
and isolated ground bars listing) for more informa- boxes, interiors and trims 3
● Full menu of branch tion on the Pow-R-Stock to stock.
breakers available Plus factory-assembled
panelboard option.
3
3
3
3
3
Customer Manufacturing Solution Centers
Manufacturing Plant Locations

3
3
•
3
SEATTLE
3
•
HARTFORD •
3
• •
CHICAGO CLEVELAND
• •
DENVER NEW JERSEY
•
SAN FRANCISCO
3
•
ST. LOUIS BALTIMORE
3 RALEIGH
•
3 • LOS ANGELES SUMTER
• ★
ATLANTA
3 • PHOENIX
DALLAS •
3 •
HOUSTON
• ORLANDO
3
3 Main Plant
3 Sumter
845 Corporate Circle
Denver
2450 Airport Road
Phoenix
560 N. 54th Street
3 P.O. Box 2258
Sumter, SC 29151
Suite C
Aurora, CO 80011
Chandler, AZ 85226
Fax (480) 449-4223
(803) 481-3131 Fax (303) 366-9993 Phone (480) 449-4222
3 Phone (303) 366-2080
Satellite Plants Raleigh
3 Atlanta Hartford
40A International Drive
9400 Globe Center Drive
Suite 121
7000 Highlands Parkway SE
3 Suite 103 Windsor, CT 06095 Morrisville, NC 27560
Smyrna, GA 30082 Fax (860) 298-1305 Fax (919) 572-9751
Phone (860) 298-1306 Phone (919) 544-7074
3 Fax (770) 433-1863
Phone (678) 309-4260 Houston St. Louis
3 Baltimore
7451 Coca Cola Drive
14825 Northwest Freeway
#100-C
56 Soccer Park Road
Fenton, MO 63026
Houston, TX 77040 Fax (636) 717-3505
3 Suite C
Hanover, MD 21076 Fax (713) 744-7531 Phone (636) 717-3500
Fax (410) 796-7755 Phone (713) 744-7530
3 Phone (410) 796-7777 Los Angeles
San Francisco
20923 Cabot Boulevard
11120 Philadelphia Street Hayward, CA 94545
3 Chicago
220 Windy Point Drive Suite A Fax (510) 784-8980
Glendale Heights, IL 60139 Mira Loma, CA 91752 Phone (510) 784-8981
3 Fax (630) 690-7453 Fax (951) 685-3775
Seattle
Phone (630) 260-6303 Phone (951) 685-5788
1604 15th Street SW
3 Cleveland New Jersey Suite 114
96 Stemmers Lane Auburn, WA 98001
3
12875 Corporate Drive
Suite E Westampton, NJ 08060 Fax (253) 833-5058
Parma, OH 44130 Fax (609) 835-4777 Phone (253) 833-5021
3 Fax (216) 433-0545 Phone (609) 835-4230
Phone (216) 433-0616 Orlando
3 Dallas 9436 Southridge Park Court
631 Westport Parkway Suite 100
3 Suite 100 Orlando, FL 32819
Grapevine, TX 76051 Fax (407) 264-9310
3 Fax (817) 251-6249 Phone (407) 264-9300
Phone (817) 251-6797
3
3.9
A unique concept of Highly trained and Speedy Delivery
3
facilities close to customer experienced personnel will
locations, assuring fast manage your order and
● Panelboards: from one to
five days.
3
delivery of standard- and ensure that you receive on-
Switchboards: between
3
●
custom-assembled time delivery of high quality
five and 10 days.
equipment when equipment that meets your
Assembled Enclosed Circuit
3
●
it’s needed. specifications.
Breakers: from one to
Located at strategic locations Special Configurations 10 days.
throughout the United States, The unique capabilities of 3
these facilities manufacture Save Time and Money
these plants and people can
and deliver standard or
custom-assembled
provide solutions for special No matter your location, you 3
products to meet special will save time and money
panelboards, switchboards
and enclosed circuit
needs. when ordering from a
CMSC location. For more
3
breakers…when and where Typical examples include information, contact your
you need them. And, when special dimensions, retrofit Eaton representative or 3
you have an emergency, they equipment and panelboard authorized distributor.
can have your equipment interiors to fit existing boxes. 3
ready in hours.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Panelboards and Lighting Control EATON PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Panelboards and Lighting Control EATON PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Panelboards and Lighting Control EATON PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Panelboards and Lighting Control

3 Bolt-On or Plug-On Circuit

3 Branch circuit breakers

Product Types, continued

Integral power switching controls Designed to meet specific

trim designs in more than a rather than minutes

V2-T3-4 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—April 2014 www.eaton.com

3 90.00 (2286.0) YS2090 LT2090S or F EZB2090R EZT2090S or F

3 90.00 (2286.0) YS2090 LTV2090S or F EZB2090R EZTV2090S or F

3 Type PRL3a (800A)

3 Box Dimensions—Inches (mm)

3 48.00 (1219.2) YS2848 LTV2848S or F

3 1 EZ box must be used with EZ trim.

Main lugs are mechanical

and branch breaker components required for

3 with the branches. Available

required where such

overcurrent device. microprocessor-based

conductors, consideration are treated as attachments to ● Underwriters Laboratories:

Terminal Wire Ranges, Pressure-Type Al/Cu Terminals Except as Noted

3 Standard Main Lug Terminals

3 PRL1a #12–1/0 #6–300 kcmil — (2) #4–500 kcmil — — —

3 PRL2aF #12–1/0 #6–300 kcmil — (2) #4–500 kcmil — — —

3 PRC25 #12–1/0 #6–300 kcmil — (2) #4–500 kcmil — — —

MDL, HMDL, HMDLDC 2

3 QBHW 23, QPHW 23 15–70 1 120 22 — — — — — —

3 GQ, GHQ 2, GHQRSP,

3 EHD 23 15–100 1 277 — — 14 — — 10 —

3 15–125 2, 3 480 — 200 — 65 — — 42

3 15–225 2, 3 600 — 100 — 65 25 — 22

MDL 5, CMDL 35 400–800 2, 3 600 — 65 — 50 25 — 22 4

Series Rated Combinations Applying Series Ratings Page V2-T3-17

3 be selected to qualify the

short-circuit ratings shown.

120/240 Vac—Breaker/Breaker Series Ratings, continued

3 Main Breaker Series Equipment Rating—kA Symmetrical

3 QPGF QBHW QPHW QBHW

240 Vac—Breaker/Breaker Series Ratings, continued

3 EHD FD, EDB, EDS ED EHD

3 KD, KDB, DK EHD

3 EDB, EDS, ED EDB, EDS, ED

480Y/277 Vac—Breaker/Breaker Series Ratings

480 Vac—Breaker/Breaker Series Ratings

3 250 JD, JDB HJD JDC LCL

3 400 KD, KDB HKD KDC LA-P LCL

120/240 Vac—Fuse/Breaker Series Ratings 3

240 Vac—Fuse/Breaker Series Ratings

480 Vac—Fuse/Breaker Series Ratings Triple Series Ratings 3

● Bolt-on or plug-on branch through V2-T3-23 for

100 18 EHD 15–50 2 10 QBGFEP, QPGFEP 4 3

100 65 FD, FDE 15–30 10 BABRSP 8

100 100 HFD, HFDE 70 22 QBHW, QPHW 3

400 200 KDC

Box Sizing and Selection

Box Sizing and Selection

Main lugs or main FD, HFD,

Main lugs or main DK, KD, HKD,

● Refer to Page V2-T3-7 for

15–60 22 QBHW 6 Arc fault circuit breaker.